Siemens Gigaset S450 IP User Manual

Issued by  
Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG  
Schlavenhorst 66  
D-46395 Bocholt  
© Siemens Home and Office Communication Devices GmbH & Co. KG
2007  
All rights reserved. Subject to availability.  
Rights of modification reserved.  
Gigaset  
www.siemens.com/gigaset  
S450 IP  
The handset at a glance  
Handset keys  
1 Display in idle status (example)  
2 Battery charge status  
The handset at a glance  
e V U (1/3 charged to fully charged)  
= flashes: battery nearly empty  
e V U flashes: battery charging  
3 Display keys (page 24)  
4 Message key  
Opens calls and message lists  
Flashes: new message or new call  
5 End call key, On/Off key  
End call, cancel function, go back one menu  
level (press briefly), back to idle status  
(press and hold), activate/deactivate  
handset (press and hold in idle status)  
6 Connection socket for headset (page 15)  
7 Hash key  
Keypad lock on/off (press and hold,  
page 23)  
Toggle between upper/lower case letters  
and digits for text entry (page 102)  
8 Call-by-call list key (not for VoIP)  
Open call-by-call list  
1
2
15  
Ð
V
INT 1  
10.06.06  
FixedLine  
09:45  
IP  
3
14  
13  
12  
4
5
9 Recall key (not for VoIP)  
Enter flash (press briefly)  
Insert a pause (press and hold)  
10 Star key  
11  
Ringer tones on/off (press and hold in  
idle status)  
Open special characters table  
11 Key 1 (press and hold)  
Calling the network mailbox  
12 Talk key  
6
7
8
10  
9
Accept call, open last number redial list  
(press briefly in idle status), select connec-  
tion type and start dialling (press briefly/  
press and hold after entering the number,  
page 20)  
13 Handsfree key  
Change between speaker/handsfree mode  
Lights up: handsfree talking activated  
Flashes: incoming call  
Base station at a glance  
14 Control key (page 23)  
15 Signal strength  
Ò Ñ i (low to high)  
| flashes: no reception  
Base station key  
1 Paging key  
Lights up: LAN connection active  
(phone is connected to router)  
Flashes:  
Data transfer to LAN connection  
Press briefly: start paging (page 57)  
Press and hold:  
1
Set base station to registration mode  
(page 56)  
1
                                         
Contents  
Gigaset.net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
the Gigaset.net directory . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Entering, editing and deleting  
Base station at a glance . . . . . . . . 1  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Gigaset S450 IP –  
more than just a telephone . . . . . 6  
Last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Pack contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Setting up the handset for use . . . . . . . 7  
Installing the base station . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Connecting the base station . . . . . . . 10  
Displaying the call duration . . . . . . . . 35  
Web configurator menu . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Writing/sending an SMS . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Receiving an SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Notification by SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
SMS mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
SMS on a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Activating/deactivating  
Making an external call . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Answering a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . 21  
Handsfree talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
E-mail notifications . . . . . . . . . . 45  
incoming e-mail server . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Activating/deactivating the handset . 23  
Activating/deactivating  
the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Reverting to idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Menu guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Correcting incorrect entries . . . . . . . . 25  
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
going online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Changing/checking your  
personal status, going offline . . . . . . . 50  
2
Opening the buddy list . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Receiving messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Writing and sending messages . . . . . 53  
Activating/deactivating  
Setting the default connection . . . . . . 67  
Using the network mailbox . . . . 55  
for fast access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Using the connection assistant . . . . . . 68  
connection assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
in LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
of VoIP status messages . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
De-registering handsets . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Changing the base station . . . . . . . . . 57  
Changing a handset's internal  
MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Changing the dialling mode . . . . . . . . 71  
Setting pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Changing the display language . . . . . 61  
Setting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setting the display backlight . . . . . . . 62  
Configuring the phone via your PC . . . 72  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Registering, setting the  
display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Activating/deactivating  
auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Changing ringer tones . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Activating/deactivating advisory  
Setting the alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Web configurator language . . . . . . . . 72  
Logging off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Opening Web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Setting the phone with  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Configuring telephone connections . . 77  
VoIP connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Assigning sending and  
Setting DTMF signalling for VoIP . . . . 86  
Defining local communication  
Defining dialling plans . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Loading/deleting directories  
Base station settings . . . . . . . . . . 65  
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Activating/deactivating music  
on hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
into/from the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
3
Making e-mail settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 91  
updates, starting the update . . . . . . . 92  
automatic version check . . . . . . . . . . 93  
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Searching for service information . . . 99  
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Example of a menu input . . . . . . . . . 100  
Example: multiple line input . . . . . . 101  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120  
4
Safety precautions  
Safety precautions  
Warning:  
Read the safety precautions and the user guide before use.  
Explain their contents and the potential hazards associated with using the telephone to your children.  
Only use the mains adapter supplied, as indicated on the underside of the base station.  
$
Use only recommended rechargeable batteries (page 99) of the same type! This means  
that you must not use any other battery type or non-rechargeable batteries as this could  
result in significant health risks and personal injury.  
Insert rechargeable batteries with the correct polarity, and use them in accordance with  
this user guide (polarity symbols can be seen in or on the handset's battery compartment,  
page 7).  
Œ
The operation of medical appliances may be affected. Be aware of the technical conditions  
in your particular environment, e.g. a doctor's surgery.  
Do not hold the rear of the handset to your ear when it is ringing or when the handsfree  
function is activated. Otherwise you risk serious and permanent damage to your hearing.  
The handset may cause an unpleasant humming noise in hearing aids.  
Do not install the base station in bathrooms or shower rooms. The handset and base  
station are not splashproof (page 94).  
Do not use your phone in environments where there is a risk of an explosion  
(e.g. paint shops.  
If you give your Gigaset to someone else, make sure you also give them the user guide.  
ƒ
All electrical and electronic equipment must be disposed of separately from general  
household waste using the sites designated by local authorities.  
If a product displays this symbol of a crossed-out rubbish bin, the product is subject to  
European Directive 2002/96/EC.  
The appropriate disposal and separate collection of used equipment serve to prevent  
potential harm to the environment and to health. They are a precondition for the re-use  
and recycling of used electrical and electronic equipment.  
For further information on disposing of your used equipment, please contact your local  
authority, your refuse collection service or the dealer you purchased the product from.  
Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if the keypad lock is activated!  
Please note:  
Not all of the functions described in this manual are available in all countries.  
5
             
Gigaset S450 IP – more than just a telephone  
u Assign your own password (system  
PIN) to protect your device and the  
Web configurator from unauthorised  
access (page 65).  
Gigaset S450 IP –  
more than just a telephone  
u Send and receive SMS messages via the  
Your phone lets you make calls both via  
the fixed network and (cost effectively) via  
the Internet (VoIP) without using a PC.  
fixed network (page 36).  
u Use instant messaging on your hand-  
set. Go online and see which of your  
messenger contacts (buddies) are  
online as well. Chat with your buddies,  
send and receive text messages, or give  
them a call (page 48).  
And your phone can do much more  
besides:  
u Press a button each time you make a  
call to indicate whether you want to call  
via the fixed network or the Internet  
(page 20).  
u Let your phone tell you, without  
requiring a PC, about new e-mail mes-  
sages in your mailbox (page 45).  
u Register up to six handsets on your  
base station. You can use your base  
station to make three simultaneous  
calls using VoIP, or one call using the  
fixed network and two using VoIP.  
u Save up to 150 numbers and names in  
your handset (page 30).  
u Transfer your Outlook contacts from  
the PC onto your handset. Or back your  
handset directory up on your PC.  
u Multiline: Set up a separate VoIP  
account for each member of your fam-  
ily with their own VoIP phone number  
(up to six accounts with different VoIP  
providers). If you include your fixed  
network number, your phone can be  
reached on up to seven different  
phone numbers. These can be ass-  
igned to the individual handsets. If a  
member of your family is called on their  
number, only their handset will ring.  
u You can programme the keys of your  
phone with important phone numbers.  
The phone number is then dialled by  
simply pressing the respective key  
(page 31).  
u Keep your hands free when making a  
call. Use the handsfree function on  
your handset (page 22) or use the  
convenient headset to make calls  
(page 15, accessories, not included in  
the scope of delivery).  
u Use Gigaset.net for VoIP calls. Connect  
your phone to the power supply and  
the Internet, and enjoy free phone calls  
on Gigaset.net – no need to make any  
other settings (page 25).  
u Make sure your phone is always up-to-  
date. Keep yourself informed about  
firmware updates on the Internet and  
load them onto your phone (page 67).  
u Configure the phone connection for  
VoIP without a PC. Your phone's con-  
nection assistant downloads general  
data about your VoIP provider from the  
Internet and guides you through  
entering your personal data (VoIP/SIP  
account). This makes it easy for you to  
start using VoIP (page 12).  
u Use your handset as an alarm clock  
(page 64).  
Your Gigaset S450 IP has a protected operating  
system that offers increased security against  
viruses from the Internet.  
Have fun using your new telephone!  
u If necessary, establish any further  
required VoIP settings on a PC.  
The phone features a Web interface  
(Web configurator) that can be  
accessed via your PC's Web browser  
(page 72).  
6
 
VoIP – making calls via the Internet  
VoIP – making calls via  
the Internet  
First steps  
Pack contents  
With VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol),  
your calls are not made via a fixed connec-  
tion as in the telephone network, but  
rather they are transmitted via the Inter-  
net in the form of data packets.  
The pack contains:  
u one Gigaset S450 IP base station  
u one Gigaset S45 handset  
u one mains adapter for the base station  
u one charging cradle incl. mains adapter  
u one phone cord  
u one Ethernet cable (LAN cable)  
u two batteries  
u one battery cover  
u one belt clip  
u one quick guide  
You can take advantage of all the benefits  
of VoIP with your phone:  
u You can make cost-effective calls at  
high voice quality with subscribers on  
the Internet, the fixed network or the  
mobile phone network.  
u Your VoIP provider will give you per-  
sonal numbers, with which you can be  
reached from the Internet, the fixed  
network and any mobile phone net-  
work.  
Setting up the handset for use  
To be able to use VoIP, you need the fol-  
lowing:  
The display is protected by a  
plastic film. Please remove  
the protective film!  
u A broadband Internet connection  
(e.g. DSL) with flat rate (recom-  
mended) or volume-based price  
u Internet access, i.e. you need a router  
that will connect your phone to the  
Internet. You will find a list of recom-  
mended routers on the Gigaset S450 IP  
product page at:  
Inserting the batteries  
Warning:  
Use only the rechargeable batteries recom-  
mended by Siemens Home and Office  
Communication Devices GmbH & Co.KG on  
page 99! This means on no account should  
you use conventional (non-rechargeable) bat-  
teries or other battery types, otherwise serious  
damage to health and property cannot be  
ruled out, e.g. the outer casing of the batteries  
could be destroyed or the batteries could  
explode. The phone could also malfunction or  
be damaged as a result of using batteries that  
are not of the recommended type.  
u Access to the services of a VoIP pro-  
vider. Open up to six accounts with  
different VoIP providers.  
7
                   
First steps  
¤ Insert the batteries the right way round  
Opening the battery cover  
(see figure).  
¤ If fitted, remove the belt clip.  
The polarity is indicated in/on the battery  
compartment.  
¤ Place your finger in the headset socket  
cavity and pull the battery cover  
upwards.  
The handset switches on automatically.  
You will hear a confirmation tone.  
Closing the battery cover  
¤ First, align the notches on the side of  
the battery cover with the protrusions  
Connecting the charging cradle  
¤ oThnetnhepriensssidteheofctohveerhuonutsiilnigt .clicks into  
Connecting the charging cradle and  
mounting it on the wall (if required) is  
described at the end of this user guide.  
place.  
¤ To charge the batteries, leave the hand-  
set in the charging cradle.  
Please note:  
Only place the handset in the charging cra-  
dle that is intended for it.  
If the handset has switched itself off  
because the batteries are flat and if it is  
then placed in the charging cradle, it will  
switch itself on automatically.  
For questions and problems see page 94.  
8
 
First steps  
Initial charging and discharging of  
batteries  
Setting the date and time  
If the date and time on the phone have not  
yet been set, the §Time§ display key will  
appear. You can use the v ¢ Ð Settings  
¢ Date/Time menu at a later point to enter  
the date and time.  
Battery charging is indicated in the top  
right of the display by a flashing battery  
icon e, V or U. During handset oper-  
ation, the battery icon indicates the  
charge status of the batteries (page 1).  
¤ Press §Time§ or open the menu.  
The correct charge status can only be dis-  
played when the batteries are first fully  
charged and discharged through use.  
¤ To do this, leave the handset in the  
charging cradle without interruption  
until the battery icon stops flashing in  
¤ tOhnecdeisthpelayba(tatreoruiensda1re3fhuolluyrcsh).arged,  
remove the handset from the charging  
cradle and do not put it back again until  
the batteries are fully discharged.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Date:  
Enter day, month and year in 6-digit  
format.  
Time:  
Enter hours and minutes as 4 digits  
(e.g. Q M 1 5 for 7:15 a.m.  
§Save§  
The date and time are shown in the hand-  
set's idle display (page 1).  
Please note:  
Registering the handset to the base  
station  
After the first battery charge and discharge,  
you may place your handset in the charging  
cradle after every call.  
Your handset is registered to the base sta-  
tion by default.  
Please note:  
Instructions on how to register further  
handsets to the base station are given on  
page 56.  
u Always repeat the charging and dis-  
charging procedure if you remove the  
batteries from the handset and reinsert  
them.  
Installing the base station  
u The batteries may warm up during  
charging. This is not dangerous.  
The base station is designed for use in  
closed, dry rooms with a temperature  
range of +5°C to +45°C.  
u After a while the charge capacity of the  
batteries will decrease for technical rea-  
sons.  
¤ Place or hang the base station in a  
central position in your flat or house.  
Please note:  
You will find explanations for the symbols and  
typographical conventions used in this user  
guide in the appendix, page 100.  
Please note:  
u Never expose the telephone to heat  
sources, direct sunlight or other electri-  
cal appliances.  
u Protect your Gigaset from moisture,  
dust, corrosive liquids and vapours.  
9
         
First steps  
Connecting the base station  
In order to be able to make calls with your  
phone via the fixed network and via VoIP,  
you must connect the base station to  
the fixed network and the Internet, see  
Figure 1.  
Internet  
4
1
LAN  
1
Fixed network  
3
2
Figure 1 Connecting the phone to the fixed network and the Internet  
1 Internet connection:  
Follow the steps in the order given below:  
Router and modem (in picture) or  
router with integrated modem  
2 Gigaset S450 IP base station  
3 Gigaset S45 handset  
1. Connect the base station to the fixed  
network phone port  
2. Connect the base station with the  
mains power supply  
4 PC in LAN  
3. Connect the base station with the rout-  
er  
10  
     
First steps  
Connecting the base station with the  
fixed network and the mains power  
supply  
Connecting the base station with the  
router  
For Internet access you need a router  
connected to the Internet via a modem  
(this may be integrated in the router).  
¤ Please connect the phone jack first and  
then the mains adapter, as shown  
below.  
3
3
1
3
1
2
2
1 Side view of the base station  
2 Network plug (LAN) with network cable  
3 Network plug on the router  
1 Phone jack with phone cord  
2 Underside of the base station  
3 Mains adapter 230 V  
phone and router is plugged in, the paging  
key lights up on the front of the base  
station (page 1).  
Please note:  
u Keep the mains adapter plugged in at  
all times for operation, as the phone  
does not work without mains connec-  
tion.  
You can now establish VoIP connections  
within Gigaset.net (page 25).  
u If you buy a replacement phone cord  
from a retailer, ensure that the phone  
jack is connected correctly.  
Correct phone jack assignment  
1 unused  
2 unused  
3 a  
4
5
6
3
2
1
4 b  
5 unused  
6 unused  
You can now use your phone to make calls  
via the fixed network and can be reached  
on your fixed network number.  
11  
         
First steps  
As soon as the handset battery is suffi-  
ciently charged, the message key f on  
the handset will flash (around 20 minutes  
after you have put the handset in the  
charging cradle). Press the message key  
f to start the connection assistant.  
Making settings for VoIP  
telephony  
Before you can use the Internet (VoIP) to  
phone any other users on the Internet, the  
fixed network or the mobile phone net-  
work, you need the services of a VoIP pro-  
vider who supports the VoIP SIP standard.  
You will see the following display:  
Connection Assist.  
Precondition: you have registered (e.g.  
via your PC) with a suitable VoIP provider  
and set up at least one VoIP account.  
Start assistant  
for entry of VoIP  
connection data?  
The following phone settings are neces-  
sary in order for you to use VoIP. You will  
receive all information from your VoIP pro-  
vider.  
No  
Yes  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to start  
the connection assistant.  
u Your user name with the VoIP provider,  
if this is required by the VoIP provider  
~
Enter the system PIN (default  
is '0000').  
u Your registration name  
u Your password with the VoIP provider  
u VoIP provider general settings  
If you press §No§, the procedure that fol-  
lows is described below.  
The connection assistant will help you  
with the settings.  
Please note:  
The connection assistant will also start auto-  
matically if you try to establish a connection  
via the Internet, before you have made the  
necessary settings.  
Starting the connection assistant  
Precondition: The base station is con-  
nected to the mains power supply and a  
router. Your router is connected to the  
Internet (page 11).  
You can also call up the connection assistant  
at any time via the menu (page 68).  
Downloading VoIP provider data  
Tip: If VoIP is activated as the default con-  
nection for your phone (default setting  
page 67), the phone will attempt to make  
a direct connection to your VoIP provider's  
server after the connection assistant is  
closed. If incorrect/incomplete informa-  
tion means that the connection cannot be  
established, messages will be displayed  
(page 14).  
The phone establishes a connection with  
the Siemens server on the Internet. Pro-  
files with general access data for various  
VoIP providers can be downloaded here.  
After a brief period you will see the follow-  
ing display:  
Select Country  
Please note:  
Germany  
Your phone is preconfigured for dynamic  
assignment of the IP address. In order for your  
router to 'recognise' the phone, dynamic IP  
address assignment must also be activated on  
the router, i.e. the router's DHCP server is acti-  
vated. Turn to page 69 to find out how to  
assign your phone a static IP address if neces-  
sary.  
England  
France  
Netherlands, the  
Ý
OK  
12  
         
First steps  
q
q
Select country (press the con-  
trol key up/down) and press  
§OK§. The VoIP providers availa-  
ble for your VoIP profile will be  
displayed.  
Please note:  
Please note when making these entries that  
the VoIP user data is case sensitive. When you  
enter text, the first letter is capitalised by  
default. If necessary, press and hold the #  
key to switch between upper and lower case  
and numbers.  
Select your VoIP provider and  
press §OK§.  
The necessary general access data for your  
VoIP provider will be downloaded and  
saved on the phone.  
Entering your name in the Gigaset.net  
directory  
With Gigaset.net you can call other  
Gigaset.net users directly over the Internet  
free of charge, without setting up an  
account with a VoIP provider and without  
making any further settings. You can find  
Gigaset.net subscribers by carrying out a  
name search in the Gigaset.net(page 25)  
directory.  
If the data for your VoIP provider is not availa-  
ble for download, press the display key  
twice. You can then carry out the following  
steps with the connection assistant.  
You must then make the settings needed for  
the VoIP provider using the Web configurator  
(page 78). Your VoIP provider will supply you  
with this data.  
The following appears in the handset's dis-  
play:  
Entering user data for your first VoIP  
account  
Connection Assist.  
Enter the VoIP user data for the first VoIP  
account. Your VoIP provider will supply  
you with this data.  
Start assistant  
for Gigaset.net?  
You can use the Web configurator at a later  
stage to enter five further VoIP accounts (VoIP  
phone numbers) (page 77). Your phone  
(together with your fixed network number)  
can then be reached on up to seven different  
phone numbers. You can assign the phone  
numbers to the individual handsets that are  
registered with the base station as sending  
and receiving numbers (page 85).  
No  
Yes  
§Yes§  
Press the display key.  
Enter your Gigaset.net name:  
Enter the name that you  
would like to be listed under in  
the Gigaset.net directory and  
press §OK§. The name may con-  
tain up to 25 characters.  
Username:  
Enter the user name and press  
§Save§ if this is required by your  
provider.  
A connection to the Gigaset.net server is  
established.  
If there is already an entry under this  
name, you receive a message to this effect  
and you will be asked to enter a name  
again.  
Authent. Name:  
Enter the registration name  
and press §Save§.  
Authent. Password:  
Enter password and press  
§Save§.  
If an entry in the Gigaset.net directory is  
successful, the message "Your user name is  
successfully added to Gigaset.net!" is dis-  
played briefly.  
13  
           
First steps  
Server not accessible!  
The phone has no connection to the Inter-  
net.  
¤ Check the cable connection between  
the base station and the router (the  
LED on the base station must light up)  
and the connection between the router  
If the attempt to create the entry fails  
(e.g. because the phone is not connected  
to the Internet), a message to this effect is  
displayed briefly (see page 14). You can then  
create the entry later via the Gigaset.net direc-  
tory (see page 27).  
Completing the VoIP settings  
¤ aCnhdectkhewIhnettehrenretthceopnhnoecnteioisn.connected  
If you have made all the required entries,  
the message "Connection data complete" will  
appear on the display. The handset returns  
to idle status.  
to the LAN.  
– It may not have been possible to  
dynamically assign an IP address to  
the phone  
If all the settings are correct and if the  
phone can establish a connection to the  
VoIP server, then the internal name of the  
handset will be displayed (example):  
or  
– You have assigned a static IP address  
to the phone that has either already  
been assigned to another LAN sub-  
scriber or does not belong to the  
Ð
V
¤ rFoinudtetrh'seaIdPdardedssrebslsoucks.ing the hand-  
INT 1  
set menu:  
10.08.06  
FixedLine  
09:45  
v ¢ Ð Settings ¢ Base  
¢ Local Network (see page 69)  
IP  
¤ Start the Web configurator with the  
You can now use your phone to make calls  
via the fixed network and the Internet.  
Callers can reach you on your fixed  
network number and your VoIP number.  
¤ IIPf naoddcorensns.ection can be established,  
change the settings on the router  
(activate DHCP server) or the  
phone's IP address.  
Please note:  
To ensure that you can always be reached via  
the Internet, the router must be permanently  
connected to the Internet.  
Provider registration failed!  
u Your personal data for registering with  
the VoIP provider may have been  
entered incompletely or incorrectly.  
No connection to the Internet/VoIP server  
¤ Check your entries for Username,  
Authent. Name and Authent. Password.  
In particular, check your use of  
upper and lower case.  
If one of the following messages is dis-  
played instead of the internal name after  
the connection assistant is closed, errors  
have occurred:  
To do this, open the following menu  
u Server not accessible!  
u Provider registration failed!  
Below you will find possible causes and  
measures you can take.  
ovn y¢ourÐhaSnedttsientg:s ¢ Telephony  
¢ VoIP ¢ Provider Registr.  
(see page 69)  
14  
       
First steps  
u The server address for the VoIP server  
has not yet been entered, or has been  
entered incorrectly.  
Belt clip and headset  
By using a belt clip and headset (optional)  
you can easily make your handset a con-  
stant companion both inside the building  
and in its immediate vicinity.  
¤ Start the Web configurator.  
¤ Open Settings ¢ Telephony  
¢ Connections Web page.  
¤ Edit the server address where neces-  
Attaching the belt clip  
sary  
There are notches for attaching the belt  
clip on the side of the handset at the same  
height as the display.  
Please note:  
If port forwarding is activated on your router  
for the ports that have been registered as the  
SIP port (Standard 5060) and the RTP port  
(Standard 5004), it makes sense to deactivate  
DHCP and assign the phone a static IP address  
(otherwise you may not be able to hear the  
other party during VoIP calls):  
¤ Press the belt clip onto the back of the  
handset so that the protrusions on the  
belt clip engage with the notches.  
Via the handset menu:  
Ð Settings Base  
v
£
£
£
Local Network  
Or  
Via the Web configurator:  
¥
¥
Open Settings  
Web page.  
Select IP address type.  
£
IP Configuration  
Please note that the IP address and subnet  
mask depend on the router's address block.  
You must also enter the standard gateway and  
DNS server. The IP address for the router is  
generally entered here.  
Connection socket for headset  
You can use headsets with jack connec-  
tors. The following models have been  
tested and are therefore recommended:  
HAMA Plantronics M40, MX100 and  
MX150.  
The transmission quality of other models  
cannot be guaranteed.  
15  
       
Menu trees  
Menu trees  
Phone menu  
Open the main menu on your phone by right-clicking on the control key when the handset  
is in idle status: v.  
There are two ways to select a function:  
Using number combinations ('shortcut')  
¤ Enter the number combination that is in front of the function in the menu tree.  
Example: v 5 4 1 for 'Set handset language'.  
Scrolling through the menus  
¤ Scroll to the function with the control key q (press up or down) and press §OK§.  
1
î Messaging  
page 36  
1-1 SMS  
An SMS mailbox (general or private) activated with-  
out a PIN  
page 37  
page 39  
page 38  
1-1-1 New SMS  
1-1-2 Incoming (0)  
1-1-3 Outgoing (0)  
An SMS mailbox activated with a PIN or 2-3  
mailboxes  
page 37  
page 39  
page 38  
page 37  
1-1-1 Mailbox  
1-1-1-1 New SMS  
1-1-1-2 Incoming (0)  
1-1-1-3 Outgoing (0)  
1-1-2 Mailbox 1  
1-1-2-1 New SMS  
to  
Mailbox 2  
to  
1-1-4 Mailbox 3  
1-1-4-1  
page 39  
page 38  
1-1-2-2 Incoming (0)  
to  
1-1-4-2  
1-1-2-3 Outgoing (0)  
to  
1-1-4-3  
16  
           
page 42  
page 41  
page 41  
page 41  
page 37  
page 36  
1-1-6 Settings  
1-1-6-1 Service Centres  
1-1-6-2 SMS Mailboxes  
1-1-6-3 Notify Number  
1-1-6-4 Notify Type  
1-1-6-5 Status Report  
1-1-6-6 Subscribe to SMS  
1-2 E-mail  
1-2-1 Inbox (0)  
1-2-2 Settings  
page 46  
1-2-2-1 Incoming (POP3) page 45  
1-2-2-2 Registration  
page 45  
1-3 Messenger  
1-3-1 Buddies  
page 51  
page 50  
page 50  
1-3-2 User Status  
1-3-2-1 Change Status  
1-3-2-2 Info  
1-3-3 Messages  
page 52  
2
ê Sel. Services  
2-1 VoIP  
2-1-6 Call Divert  
2-1-7 Call Waiting  
page 28  
page 28  
3
4
ì Alarm Clock  
í Add. Features  
page 64  
page 59  
4-3 Room Monitor  
5
Ð Settings  
5-1 Date/Time  
page 9  
5-2 Audio Settings  
5-2-1 Ringer Settings  
5-2-2 Advisory Tones  
5-2-1-1 Ext. Calls  
5-2-1-2 Internal Calls  
5-2-1-3 All  
page 63  
page 64  
5-3 Display  
5-3-1 Screen Picture  
5-3-2 Colour Scheme  
5-3-3 Contrast  
page 61  
page 61  
page 61  
page 62  
5-3-4 Backlight  
17  
Menu trees  
5-4 Handset  
5-4-1 Language  
page 61  
page 62  
page 56  
page 57  
page 65  
5-4-2 Auto Answer  
5-4-3 Register H/Set  
5-4-4 Select Base  
5-4-5 Reset Handset  
5-5 Base  
5-5-1 Calls List Type  
5-5-1-1 Missed Calls  
5-5-1-2 All Calls  
page 34  
5-5-2 Music on hold  
5-5-3 System PIN  
5-5-4 Base Reset  
5-5-5 Add. Features  
page 66  
page 65  
page 66  
page 66  
5-5-5-1 Repeater Mode  
5-6-1-1 Network Mailb.  
5-5-6 Local Network  
page 69  
page 67  
5-5-8 Software Update  
5-6 Voice Mail  
5-7 Telephony  
5-6-1 Set Key 1  
page 55  
page 67  
5-7-1 Default Line  
5-7-1-1 VoIP  
5-7-1-2 Fixed Line  
5-7-2 Connection Assist.  
5-7-4 Area Code  
page 68  
5-7-6 Fixed Line  
5-7-6-1 Dialling Mode  
5-7-6-2 Recall  
page 71  
page 71  
5-7-7 VoIP  
5-7-7-1 Show Stat. on HS page 70  
5-7-7-2 Select Provider  
5-7-7-3 Provider Registr.  
page 68  
page 69  
18  
Menu trees  
Web configurator menu  
Home  
page 72  
page 75  
Settings  
IP Configuration  
Telephony  
Connections  
page 77  
page 83  
page 85  
page 87  
page 88  
page 86  
Audio  
Number Assignment  
Dialing Plans  
Telephone Directory  
Advanced Settings  
Messaging  
Messenger  
E-Mail  
page 90  
page 91  
Miscellaneous  
Device  
page 92to  
page 93  
Status  
page 93  
19  
   
Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network  
Making calls with VoIP and  
the fixed network  
Please note:  
If you use a different GAP-compatible handset  
to the Gigaset S45, all calls will be made via the  
default connection, even if you press and hold  
the talk key c. If you want to use the non-  
default connection to make a call, enter a star  
(*) at the end of the number.  
Making an external call  
Selecting the connection type using  
display keys and making a call  
Precondition: The display keys on your  
handset are assigned to §FixedLine§ and/or §IP§  
(default setting for the Gigaset S45).  
External calls are calls made via the public  
telephone network (fixed network) or via  
the Internet (VoIP). You determine what  
type of connection you want to use when  
you dial.  
§FixedLine§ / §IP§  
Please note:  
Press the display key to select  
the connection type.  
You can use your base station to make  
three simultaneous external calls (on three  
handsets): three calls using VoIP or two  
calls using VoIP and one call using the fixed  
network.  
~ s  
Enter the number or select  
from the directory.  
c / d Press the talk or handsfree key.  
You can define which of your VoIP phone  
numbers (VoIP account) are used for outgo-  
ing external VoIP calls via the handset  
(Number Assignment, page 85).  
If you use VoIP to make a call to the fixed  
network, you may also have to dial the area  
code for local calls (depending on the VoIP  
provider).  
The number will be called via the selected  
connection type, regardless of whether  
the talk key was pressed briefly or pressed  
and held.  
Entering an IP address  
You can also dial an IP address instead of a  
phone number using VoIP.  
You can also enter the dialling code in  
the configuration so you do not always  
need to enter it for local calls (Dialing Plans,  
page 87). It will then be inserted automati-  
cally for local calls.  
¤ Press the star key * to separate the  
sections of the IP address  
Use the talk key to select the type of  
connection and make the call  
¤ (Ifen.ge.ce1s4s9a*ry24p6re*s1s2th2e*2#8). key to attach  
the SIP port number of the person you  
are calling to the IP address (e.g.  
149*246*122*28#5060).  
~ c  
Enter number/IP address and  
briefly press/press and hold  
the talk key.  
Please note:  
Dialling with the directory (page 30) or last  
number redial list (page 33) saves repeated  
keying of phone numbers.  
A default connection is established on  
your phone (fixed network or VoIP,  
page 67).  
You can assign a number from the directory  
to a key for quick dialling (page 31).  
You can edit or add to any phone number  
selected via speed dial or from the directory  
and use it for the current call.  
¤ Briefly press the talk key c if you  
want to make a call via this default con-  
nection.  
¤ Press and hold the talk key c if you  
want to make the call via the other con-  
nection type.  
Cancelling the dialling operation  
You can cancel the dialling operation with  
the end call key a.  
20  
                   
Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network  
– CNIP (Calling Name Identification  
Presentation): the caller's name is  
displayed  
Ending a call  
a
Press the end call key.  
u You have arranged CLIP or CNIP with  
your network provider.  
Answering a call  
u The caller has arranged CLI with the  
network provider.  
The handset indicates an incoming call in  
three ways: by ringing, by a display on the  
screen and by the flashing handsfree key  
d.  
If the phone number is identified and the  
caller's number is saved in your directory,  
the name will be displayed from the direc-  
tory.  
Only calls to receiving numbers that are  
assigned to your handset will be signalled  
(page 85).  
If a phone number is not assigned to any  
handset as a receiving number, the calls will  
be signalled on all handsets.  
Call display  
You can use the display to decide whether  
the call is for your fixed network number  
or your VoIP number.  
Calls to your fixed network number  
You can accept the call by:  
¤ Pressing the talk key c.  
¤ Pressing the display key §Accept§.  
¤ Pressing the handsfree key d.  
1
Å
2
3
If the handset is in the charging cradle and  
the Auto Answer function is activated  
(page 62), the handset will take a call  
automatically when you lift it out of the  
cradle.  
1234567890  
for Fixed network  
Accept  
Silence  
1 Ringer tone icon  
2 Number or name of caller  
If the ringer tone is intrusive, press the  
§Silence§ display key. You can accept the call  
so long as it is displayed on the screen.  
3 Display of the receiving number: the name is  
displayed that you have assigned to your  
fixed network number (page 82).  
Calls to your VoIP number  
Calling Line Identification  
When you receive a call from the Internet,  
the caller's number and/or the name they  
have specified is displayed on the screen.  
1
Å
2
3
IP: 1234567890  
for Anna  
When you receive a call from the fixed net-  
work, the caller's number and/or name is  
displayed on the screen if the following  
conditions are met:  
Accept  
Silence  
u Your fixed network provider supports  
1 Ringer tone icon  
2 Number or name of caller  
CLIP, CLI and CNIP:  
3 Receiving number: indicates which of your  
VoIP phone numbers the caller has dialled.  
You assign the names when you enter the  
VoIP phone numbers into the phone  
(page 78). For calls from Gigaset.net,  
for Gigaset.net is displayed.  
– CLI (Calling Line Identification):  
number of the caller is transmitted  
– CLIP (Calling Line Identification  
Presentation): the caller's number is  
displayed.  
21  
                                 
Making calls with VoIP and the fixed network  
Display when Calling Line Identification is  
withheld  
Handsfree talking  
In handsfree mode, instead of holding the  
handset to your ear you can put it down,  
e.g. on the table in front of you, to allow  
others to participate in the call.  
For calls from the fixed network, the caller  
can withhold calling line identification or  
not request it. In this case the number is  
not displayed. The following is displayed  
in place of the number:  
Activating/deactivating handsfree  
mode  
u External, if no number is transmitted.  
u Withheld, if the caller has withheld Call-  
ing Line Identification.  
Activating while dialling  
u Unavailable, if the caller has not  
~ d Enter number and press  
arranged Calling Line Identification.  
briefly/press and hold the  
handsfree key to select the  
connection type (page 20).  
Display with CNIP  
¤ You should inform your caller before  
you use the handsfree function so that  
they know someone else is listening.  
Precondition: the call comes from a con-  
nection in the fixed network.  
If you have CNIP, then the name (town)  
that is registered with your network pro-  
vider for that calling number will also be  
displayed. If the caller's number is stored  
in your directory then the directory entry  
will be shown.  
Switching between earpiece and  
handsfree mode  
¤ Press the handsfree key d to activate  
or deactivate handsfree talking during  
a call.  
If you wish to place the handset in the  
charging cradle during a call:  
1
IP: 1234567890  
¤ Press and hold the handsfree key d  
while placing the handset in the charg-  
ing cradle. If the handsfree key d  
does not light up, press the key again.  
Peter Sand,  
London  
2
3
for Anna  
For how to adjust the loudspeaker vol-  
ume, see page 63.  
1 Caller's number. IP: is displayed if the caller  
has dialled one of your VoIP phone num-  
bers.  
2 Name and town (IP is displayed for calls  
made via the Internet)  
Muting the handset  
3 Receiving number or the name assigned  
You can deactivate the microphone in  
your handset during an external call.  
Your caller will hear hold music, if acti-  
vated (page 66).  
The display shows:  
u External, if no number is transmitted.  
u Withheld, if the caller has withheld Call-  
ing Line Identification.  
Muting the handset  
u Unavailable, if the caller has not  
u
Press the control key on the  
left to mute the handset.  
arranged Calling Line Identification.  
Cancelling muting  
/ a Press the display key or the  
end call key to cancel the mut-  
ing.  
22  
                     
Operating the handset  
The keypad lock deactivates automatically  
when you receive a call and activates  
again after the call.  
Dialling the emergency number  
The default setting for your phone is that  
all numbers that are saved as emergency  
numbers are automatically dialled using  
the fixed network. The selected connec-  
tion type (Internet or fixed network) is  
irrelevant for dialling.  
Please note:  
The handset displays an advisory message if  
you press a key by accident while the keypad  
lock is on. To deactivate the keypad lock, press  
and hold the hash key #.  
You can deactivate this function using the  
phone's Web configurator (see dialling  
rules, page 88), e.g. if you use the phone  
without a fixed network. However, you  
should ask beforehand, whether your VoIP  
provider supports emergency numbers.  
Control key  
Please note:  
If you have used the Web configurator to  
deactivate the Emergency calls always via  
fixed line function and have entered an  
automatic area code for VoIP calls  
(page 87), the area code will also be pre-  
fixed to the emergency numbers when  
they are dialled via VoIP.  
In this user guide, the side of the control  
key that you must press in the given oper-  
ating situation is shown in black (top, bot-  
tom). Example: t for 'press up on the  
control key'.  
Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if  
the key lock is activated. Before dialling,  
press and hold the hash key #, to  
release the key lock.  
The control key has a number of different  
functions:  
When the handset is in idle status  
s
Press and release to open the  
handset directory.  
Press and hold to open the list  
of available online directories  
(e.g. Gigaset.net directory).  
Operating the handset  
Activating/deactivating the  
handset  
v
u
t
Open main menu.  
Open list of handsets.  
Adjust the ringer volume of  
the handset (page 63).  
a
Press and hold the end call  
key.  
You will hear the confirmation tone.  
In lists and menus  
t / s Scroll up/down line by line.  
Activating/deactivating  
the keypad lock  
v
Open submenu or confirm  
selection.  
u
Go back one menu level or  
cancel.  
#
Press and hold the hash key.  
You will hear the confirmation tone. The  
Ø icon appears in the display when the  
keypad lock is activated.  
In an input field  
You can use the control key to move the  
cursor up t, down s, right v or left  
u.  
23  
                             
Operating the handset  
During an external call  
Reverting to idle status  
s
Press and release to open the  
handset directory.  
You can revert to idle status from any-  
where in the menu as follows:  
Press and hold to open the list  
of available online directories  
(e.g. Gigaset.net directory).  
¤ Press and hold the end call key a.  
Or:  
u
t
Initiate an internal consulta-  
tion call.  
¤ Do not press any key: after 2 minutes  
the display will automatically revert to  
idle status.  
Adjust loudspeaker volume for  
earpiece and handsfree mode.  
Changes that you have not confirmed or  
saved by pressing §OK§, §Yes§, §Save§, §Send§ or  
Save Entry §OK§ will be lost.  
Display keys  
You can find an example of the display in  
idle status on page 1.  
The current display functions are shown in  
the bottom display line in reversed high-  
lights. The function of the display keys  
changes depending on the particular  
operating situation.  
Menu guidance  
Your telephone's functions are accessed  
using a menu that has a number of levels.  
Example:  
Main menu (first menu level)  
1
¤ To open the main menu, press v with  
FixedLine  
IP  
the handset in idle status.  
The main menu functions are shown in  
the display as a list with icon and name.  
2
Accessing a function  
¤ Scroll to the function with the control  
1 Current display key functions are shown in  
the bottom display line.  
2 Display keys  
key q and press §OK§.  
Or:  
The most important display symbols are:  
¤ Enter the number that is in front of the  
§§§§§Menu§§§§  
§Options§  
Open the main menu.  
function in the menu tree (page 16).  
Open a context-dependent  
menu.  
The corresponding submenu (the next  
menu level) is opened.  
W
Delete key: deletes one char-  
acter at a time from right to  
left.  
Submenus  
The functions in the submenus are dis-  
played as lists.  
Î
Go back one menu level or  
cancel operation.  
To access a function:  
Ó
Copy number into directory.  
¤ Scroll to the function with the control  
Open the last number redial  
list.  
key q and press §OK§.  
24  
                           
VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net  
Or:  
for your Internet connection. Connections  
to/from other networks are not possible.  
¤ Enter the number combination that is  
in front of the function in the menu  
tree (page 16).  
Every Gigaset VoIP device is assigned a  
Gigaset.net phone number by default  
(page 99).  
Briefly press the end call key a once to  
return to the previous menu level / cancel  
the operation.  
All registered subscribers are included in  
the Gigaset.net directory, which you are  
able to access.  
Correcting incorrect entries  
Exclusion of liability  
Gigaset.net is a voluntary service provided by  
Siemens Home and Office Communication  
GmbH & Co KG with no liability or guarantee  
for the availability of the network. This service  
can be terminated at any time with a notice  
period of three months.  
You can correct incorrect characters in the  
text by navigating to the incorrect entry  
using the control key. You can then:  
u Press X to delete the character to the  
left of the cursor.  
u Insert new character to the left of the  
Please note:  
cursor.  
If you do not use your Gigaset.net connection  
for six weeks, it is automatically deactivated.  
You cannot be reached for calls from the  
Gigaset.net.  
u When entering the time and date etc.,  
edit the flashing character.  
You will find examples of symbols used,  
menu entries and multiple line input in the  
appendix to this user guide, page 100.  
The connection is reactivated:  
as soon as you start a search in the  
Gigaset.net directory or  
make a call via the Gigaset.net (dial a  
number with #9 at the end) or  
activate the connection via the Web config-  
urator (page 82).  
VoIP telephony via  
Gigaset.net  
Searching for subscribers in  
the Gigaset.net directory  
You can use Gigaset.net to make free  
phone calls via the Internet directly to  
other Gigaset.net users, without having to  
set up an account with a VoIP provider or  
make any further settings! You simply  
have to connect your phone to the power  
supply and the Internet connection and, if  
necessary, enter yourself in the  
Your handset is in idle status. A VoIP con-  
nection is free.  
s
q
Press and hold.  
If necessary select Gigaset.net  
from the list of available  
online directories and press  
§OK§.  
Gigaset.net online directory under a name  
of your choice (page 13/page 27).  
Gigaset net is a VoIP service provided by  
Siemens Home and Office Communica-  
tion Devices GmbH und Co KG, which is  
available to all users with a Gigaset VoIP  
device.  
Please note:  
Calls to the Gigaset.net directory are always  
free of charge.  
You can also open the Gigaset.net directory  
by dialling 1188#9 (phone number of the  
Gigaset.net directory) and pressing the talk  
key c. Alternatively, create a new direc-  
tory entry with this number.  
You can call other subscribers to  
Gigaset.net free of charge, i.e. there are  
no telephone charges other than the costs  
25  
                 
VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net  
Or (when the handset is in idle status):  
Or  
¤ Press the display key §Change§ to change  
the search criteria. The previously  
entered name is copied and can be  
edited.  
11NN#O  
Enter the number (1188#9).  
c / d Press the talk or handsfree key.  
The connection to the Gigaset.net direc-  
tory is always made using VoIP.  
If there are too many matching entries in  
the Gigaset.net directory, the message Too  
many entries found! is displayed instead of a  
hit list.  
If no connection can be made to the  
Gigaset.net directory, an error message  
will be sent and the handset will go into  
idle status.  
¤ Press the display key §Detail§ to start a  
refined search. The previously entered  
name is copied and can be edited/  
expanded.  
If the connection can be made, you will be  
prompted to enter a name/partial name  
that you want to search for: Please enter  
search name.  
Calling subscribers  
¤ Enter the name or partial name and  
q c  
Select the subscriber from the  
hit list and press the talk key.  
press §OK§.  
A hit list will be displayed of all the names  
that begin with the specified character  
string (abbreviated if necessary).  
Viewing the subscriber's number  
q
Select the subscriber from the  
hit list.  
If no matching entry is found, you will be  
asked again to enter a name.  
§View§  
Press the display key.  
You can scroll through the hit list with q.  
The Gigaset.net number and name of the  
subscriber will be shown in full, if neces-  
sary using more than one line.  
Once the connection has been estab-  
lished, you will be asked to enter a name  
that you want to search for.  
Please note:  
Nickname:  
Connections to Gigaset.net are always  
established via VoIP, irrespective of which  
default connection is set on your phone.  
Pressing and holding c or pressing it  
briefly and a "*" at the end of the number  
have no effect.  
Enter the name or part of a  
name (max. 25 characters).  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Start search  
Select and press §OK§.  
You can open the Gigaset.net directory and  
establish connections, even if you have not  
entered yourself in the Gigaset.net direc-  
tory.  
If the search has been successful, a hit list  
will be displayed of all the names that  
begin with the specified character string.  
You can scroll through the hit list with q.  
If it has not been possible to find a match-  
ing entry, a corresponding message is dis-  
played. You have the following options:  
¤ Press the display key §New§ to start a new  
search.  
26  
   
VoIP telephony via Gigaset.net  
Entering/editing a name  
Using other functions  
§Edit§  
Press the display key.  
Precondition: the hit list is displayed.  
~
Edit name or enter new name  
(max. 25 characters) and press  
§OK§.  
You can delete the name with  
X.  
q (select entry) ¢§Options§  
The following functions can be selected  
with q:  
Add to directory  
Copy the number to the handset direc-  
tory. The number and name (where  
appropriate abbreviated, max. 16 char-  
acters) are copied to the directory.  
If there is not yet an entry with this name  
in the Gigaset.net directory, the name is  
saved. A message to this effect is dis-  
played. The handset switches to idle sta-  
tus.  
¤ Edit and save entry where appropri-  
ate (page 30).  
If there is already an entry with this name  
or if the entered name contains impermis-  
sible characters, you will be requested to  
enter a different name.  
The hit list is displayed again.  
New search  
Start a search with a new name  
(page 26).  
Please note:  
Own details  
If you delete the name, your entry will be  
deleted from the directory. You are no longer  
'visible' to other Gigaset.net subscribers. How-  
ever, you can still be reached via your  
Gigaset.net number. For information on how  
to display the number, see page 99.  
See "Entering, editing and deleting  
own entry" on page 27.  
Please note:  
If you dial a Gigaset.net number from the local  
directory, the connection is automatically  
established via VoIP.  
Calling a Gigaset.net subscriber  
Entering, editing and deleting  
own entry  
You can call a Gigaset.net subscriber  
directly via the Gigaset.net directory (see  
above) or via their Gigaset.net number:  
You have the following options:  
~ /s  
Enter the Gigaset.net number  
(including the #9) or select  
from the handset directory.  
u Edit the name of your entry in the  
Gigaset.net directory  
c
Press the talk key.  
u Delete your entry from the directory  
u If you did not enter a name when using  
the phone for the first time (page 13),  
specify a name and enter yourself in  
the directory.  
The connection will always be established  
via VoIP. Every number ending with #9 is  
dialled via Gigaset.net.  
Viewing own entry  
You are connected to the Gigaset.net  
directory:  
¤ Select §Options§ ¢ Own details and press  
§OK§.  
Your Gigaset.net number and, where  
applicable, your currently entered name  
are displayed.  
27  
         
Network services – VoIP  
allocated as a receiving number. If no  
other handset is available, the caller will  
Network services – VoIP  
You can use the following network serv-  
ices to make calls via the VoIP connection.  
Accepting/rejecting call waiting, see  
page 29.  
v ¢ê Sel. Services ¢VoIP  
Settings for all calls  
¢Call Waiting  
Status:  
Activate/deactivate.  
Gven¢eraêl caSlellf.oSrewrvaicredsin¢g VoIP  
¤ Press the display key §Save§.  
Please note:  
¢Call Divert  
The setting applies to all VoIP phone numbers.  
It does not affect the procedure for call waiting  
on the fixed network connection. For how to  
activate/deactivate call waiting for the fixed  
network connection, see page 28.  
A list of your phone's configured and  
activated VoIP phone numbers will be dis-  
played. VoIP phone numbers for which  
call diversion is activated are identified  
with ½.  
Functions during a call  
¤ Select the VoIP phone number for  
which you want to activate or deacti-  
¤ vCahtaencgaellmdiuvletirpsiloenli,naenidnppuret:ss §OK§.  
Consultation  
During a call:  
When:  
§Ext.Call§  
Press the display key.  
All Calls / No Answer / When Busy.  
~ c  
Enter the number or transfer  
from the directory and press  
talk key c.  
Call No.:  
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the  
number to which the call is to be  
diverted, and press Save. You can enter  
a fixed network, VoIP or mobile  
number.  
The number will be dialled via the hand-  
set's VoIP sending number.  
.Please note:  
After a few seconds, the number selected for a  
consultation call is saved in the last number  
redial list.  
Status:  
Activating/deactivating call forwarding.  
¤ Press the display key §Save§.  
If the participant answers, you have the  
following options:  
Please note that call diversion may incur addi-  
tional costs. Ask your VoIP provider.  
u Toggling:  
¤ Use q to toggle between the par-  
– End call with active participant:  
§Options§ End Active Call.  
u Conference call:  
Activate/deactivate call waiting  
ticipants.  
If call waiting is activated, a caller on one  
of your VoIP connections will hear the  
ringing tone if you are already on a call  
using this VoIP connection. This call is  
announced acoustically and visually on  
your handset screen.  
– Call both participants: press the dis-  
play key §Conf.§.  
– End the conference call (toggling):  
Calls on the fixed network connection are  
not signalled as call waiting. They are sig-  
nalled on other registeredhandsets, to  
which the fixed network number has been  
press display key §EndConf§.  
– End call with both participants: Press  
the end call key a.  
28  
                       
Network services – VoIP  
Accepting a waiting call  
Precondition: Call waiting is activated.  
§Accept§  
Press the display key.  
You have the option of toggling or holding  
a conference call.  
Please note:  
If the first call was an internal call, the inter-  
nal connection is ended.  
An internal call waiting is shown on the dis-  
play. You can neither accept the internal  
call nor reject it.  
29  
   
Using the directory and lists  
Storing a number in the directory  
Using the directory and lists  
s ¢New Entry  
The options are:  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
u Directory/call-by-call list  
u If applicable, online directories  
u Last number redial list  
u SMS, e-mail and messenger list  
u Calls list  
You can store a maximum of 150 entries  
in the directory and call-by-call list (the  
actual number depends on the size of  
the individual entries).  
Number :  
Enter number.  
Name :  
Enter name.  
Annivers.:  
Enter anniversary if required (page 32).  
Speed Dial:  
Select number key for speed dial.  
Each of the keys 2 to O can be  
assigned one number from the direc-  
tory. The number is then dialled by sim-  
ply pressing a key (page 31). Insert a  
the number is to be dialled via the  
default connection (page 67).  
You create the directory and call-by-call  
list for your own individual handset. How-  
ever, you can send the lists or individual  
entries to other handsets (page 31).  
Directory/call-by-call list  
¤ Save changes (page 101).  
Please note:  
In the directory you store numbers and  
corresponding names.  
To find out how to enter IP addresses, turn  
to page 20.  
¤ With the handset in idle status, open  
the directory by pressing the s key.  
If you add a star (*) at the end of the  
number, the number will be dialled via the  
non-standard connection (page 67), even  
if you press and release the c talk key.  
You can use the Web configurator to save  
the directory to a file on your PC, where it  
can be edited and then sent back to the  
handset (page 88). Or you can transfer  
Outlook contacts from the PC to the hand-  
set's directory.  
The call-by-call list is used to store access  
codes for network providers (called 'call-  
by-call numbers'), that can be put ahead  
of the numbers when dialling via the fixed  
network.  
¤ Open the call-by-call list in idle status  
by pressing the C key.  
Length of an entry  
Storing a number in the call-by-call list  
Number: max. 32 digits  
Name:  
max. 16 characters  
C ¢New Entry  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Please note:  
Some VoIP providers do not support local  
calls for calls to the fixed network. In this  
case, always enter the fixed network  
number with the area code in your direc-  
tory.  
Number :  
Enter number.  
Name :  
Enter name.  
Alternatively, you can also use the Web  
configurator to define an area code, which  
is automatically prefixed to all numbers  
that are dialled without an area code for  
calls via VoIP (page 87).  
You can assign a number from the directory  
to a key for quick dialling (page 31).  
30  
                   
Using the directory and lists  
Delete Entry  
Delete selected entry.  
Selecting entries in the directory and  
call-by-call list  
VIP Entry (directory only)  
s / C Open directory or call-by-call  
Mark a directory entry as VIP (Very  
Important Person) and assign it a par-  
ticular ringer tone. You can then iden-  
tify VIP calls by their ringer tones.  
list.  
You have the following options:  
u Use q to scroll to the entry until the  
required name is selected.  
Precondition: Calling Line Identifica-  
u Enter the first character of the name, or  
tion (page 21).  
scroll to the entry with q.  
Copy Entry  
Send a single entry to a handset  
(page 31).  
Dialling with the directory/call-by-call  
list  
Delete List  
Delete all entries in the directory or in  
the call-by-call list.  
s / C ¢q (Select entry; page 31)  
c
Briefly press/press and hold  
the talk key. The number is  
dialled using the selected con-  
nection type (page 20).  
Copy List  
Send complete list to a handset  
(page 31).  
Available Memory  
Please note:  
You can only dial IP addresses via VoIP.  
Display the available entries in the  
directory and call-by-call list.  
Managing directory/call-by-call list  
entries  
Using speed dial keys  
¤ Press and hold the required speed dial  
s / C ¢q (Select entry; page 31)  
key (page 30).  
If a hash (#) is placed at the end of the  
relevant phone number, the number will  
be dialled via the standard connection;  
otherwise, it is always dialled via the non-  
standard connection (page 67).  
Viewing entries  
§View§  
Press the display key. The  
entry is displayed.  
Back with §OK§.  
Editing entries  
§View§ §Edit§ Press display keys one after the  
Sending the directory/call-by-call list  
to another handset  
other.  
¤ Carry out changes and save.  
Preconditions:  
u The sending and receiving handsets  
must both be registered on the same  
base station.  
Using other functions  
s / C ¢q (Select entry; page 31)  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
u The other handset can send and receive  
The following functions can be selected  
directory entries.  
with q:  
s / C ¢q (Select entry; page 31)  
Display Number  
¢
§Options§ ¢Copy Entry / Copy List  
Change or add to a saved number and  
then dial it (press talk key c ).  
~
Enter the internal number of  
the receiving handset. You see  
Copying entry.  
Edit Entry  
Edit selected entry.  
31  
                     
Using the directory and lists  
A successful transfer is confirmed by a  
message and confirmation tone on the  
receiving handset.  
Saving an anniversary in the directory  
You can save an anniversary for every  
number in the directory and specify a time  
when you will receive a reminder call on  
the anniversary.  
If you have sent a single entry, you can  
transfer another entry with §Yes§.  
s ¢s (Select entry; page 31)  
Please note:  
u Entries with identical numbers are not  
§View§ §Edit§  
overwritten in the receiver handset.  
Press display keys one after the  
other.  
u The transfer is cancelled if the phone  
rings or if the memory of the receiving  
handset is full.  
s
Scroll to the Annivers.: line.  
§Edit§  
Press the display key.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Copying a displayed number to the  
directory  
Date:  
Enter the day/month in 4-digit format.  
You can copy numbers displayed in a list,  
e.g. the calls list or the last number redial  
list, in an SMS or during a call to the direc-  
tory.  
Time:  
Enter the hour/minute for the reminder  
call in 4-digit format.  
Prompt:  
If you have CNIP, the first 16 characters of  
the transmitted name are copied to the  
Name line.  
Select the type of signal for the  
¤ Sreamveincdhearnagneds (ppreasgse§O1K0§.1).  
A number is displayed:  
Please note:  
§Options§ ¢Copy to Directory  
A time must be specified for reminder calls. If  
you select a visual signal, a time is not required  
and is automatically set to 00.00.  
¤ Complete the entry, see page 30.  
Copying a number from the directory  
Deleting anniversaries  
You can open the directory in many oper-  
ating situations e.g. to copy a number.  
Your handset need not be in idle status.  
s ¢s (Select entry; page 31)  
§View§ §Edit§  
Press display keys one after the  
other.  
¤ Depending on the operating situation,  
open the directory with s or Ò.  
s
Scroll to the Annivers.: line.  
q
Select an entry (page 31).  
§Edit§ §Delete§ §Save§  
Press display keys one after the  
other.  
Reminder call on an anniversary  
A reminder call is signalled on the handset  
using the selected ringer tone.  
§Off§  
Press the display key to stop  
the reminder call.  
32  
               
Using the directory and lists  
Last number redial list  
Opening lists with the  
message key  
The last number redial list contains the ten  
numbers last dialled with the handset  
(max. 32 numbers). If one of the numbers  
is in the directory, the corresponding  
name will be displayed.  
You can use the message key f to open  
the following lists:  
If several mailboxes are set up  
(page 41), several lists will be dis-  
played, if required.  
Dialling from the last number redial list  
c
q
c
Press the key briefly.  
u Incoming e-mail list  
Select an entry.  
The list is only shown if new messages  
have arrived in the mailbox for the  
incoming e-mail server.  
Briefly press/press and hold  
the talk key. The number is  
dialled using the selected con-  
nection type (page 20).  
u Messenger message list  
The list is only shown on the handset  
that is online.  
When a name is displayed, you can display  
the corresponding phone number by  
pressing the §View§ display key.  
u Configuring the Network mailbox  
If your network provider supports this  
function and the network mailbox is  
configured for fast access (page 55).  
Managing entries in the last number  
redial list  
u Calls list  
c
Press the key briefly.  
Select an entry.  
Open menu.  
An advisory tone sounds as soon as a new  
message arrives in a list. The f key  
flashes (it goes off when the key is  
pressed). In idle status, the displays shows  
an icon for the new message.  
q
§Options§  
The following functions can be selected  
with q:  
Icon  
New message...  
Display Number (as in the directory,  
... in the network mailbox  
... in calls list  
Ã
page 31)  
Á
Copy to Directory  
Copying a displayed number to the  
directory (page 32).  
... in the SMS, messenger or e-  
mail list  
À
Delete Entry  
The number of new entries is shown  
beneath the corresponding icon.  
Delete selected entry.  
Delete List  
Pressing the f button will only display  
lists that contain messages (with the  
exception of the network mailbox). Lists  
with new messages are shown first and  
identified in bold. The number of mes-  
sages received in each are shown in brack-  
ets. If a list contains no new messages, the  
number of old messages will be shown.  
Delete complete list.  
Select a list with q. To open, press §OK§.  
33  
         
Using the directory and lists  
Setting the calls list type  
Please note:  
If calls are saved in the network mailbox you  
will receive a message if the appropriate set-  
tings have been made (see the network mail-  
box instructions of your network provider).  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base  
¢Calls List Type  
Missed Calls / All Calls  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
Incoming SMS list  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
The calls list entries are retained when you  
change the list type.  
All received SMS messages are saved in  
the incoming message list, see page 39.  
Opening the calls list  
Calls list  
f ¢Calls List: (2)  
Precondition: Calling Line Identification  
(CLIP, page 21).  
q
Select entry.  
Depending on the type of list set, the calls  
list contains  
The last incoming call is displayed in the  
calls list.  
u all incoming (marked with ½) and out-  
going calls  
List entry  
u missed calls only  
The numbers of the last 30 calls are saved.  
New messages are on top.  
Example of list entries:  
Multiple calls from the same number will  
be stored once in the list of missed calls  
(the latest call). The number of calls from  
this number is shown in brackets after the  
entry.  
All Calls  
Susi Sorglos  
29/08/06  
12:20  
½
Louise Miller  
29.08.06  
Delete  
11:15  
Multiple calls from the same number are  
stored several times in the list of answered  
calls.  
**************************  
Options  
u List type (in header)  
u Status of entry  
Only calls to the receiving numbers assigned to  
your handset are stored in the calls list  
(page 85).  
Bold: new entry  
If no receiving numbers are assigned, all calls  
will be stored in the calls list for all handsets.  
u Number or name of caller  
You can add the caller's number to the  
directory (page 32).  
u Date and time of call (if set, page 9)  
u Type of entry:  
– answered calls (½)  
– missed calls  
Pressing the display key §Delete§ deletes the  
marked entry.  
34  
   
Making cost-effective calls  
Managing entries in the calls list  
After pressing the display key §Options§ you  
Making cost-effective calls  
can select more functions with q:  
Using the Internet (VoIP) is the preferred  
cost-effective way of making calls. If you  
make calls via the fixed network, select a  
network provider who offers very low call  
charges (call-by-call) or have the call  
duration displayed on your handset after  
the call. You can manage call-by-call num-  
bers in the call-by-call list  
Copy to Directory  
Copying a displayed number to the  
directory.  
Information  
If a URI was received and stored for a  
VoIP call, this will be shown. The URI is  
dialled if you press the talk key c.  
The URI is not entered on the last  
number redial list.  
Displaying the call duration  
See also the following section 'Display-  
ing CNIP information'.  
The duration of a call is displayed  
u during the conversation,  
u until about three seconds after the call  
has ended if you do not replace the  
handset in the charging cradle.  
Delete List  
Delete complete list.  
When you leave the calls list all entries are  
set to the status 'old', i.e. the next time you  
call the list up they will no longer be  
shown in bold.  
Please note:  
The actual duration of the call can vary from  
that shown by a few seconds.  
Displaying CNIP information  
If you have CNIP, you can display the name  
and town that is registered with your net-  
work provider for this number.  
Linking call-by-call numbers  
with a number  
You have selected a list entry.  
You can insert the dialling code of a  
network provider ahead of the number  
('linking').  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
Information Select and press §OK§.  
C
s
Open call-by-call list.  
If the name and town are not shown, it  
means that the caller has not requested  
Calling Line Identification or that Calling  
Line Identification has been withheld.  
Select entry (call-by-call  
number).  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Press §OK§ to return to the list.  
Display Number  
Select and press §OK§.  
Selecting from the calls list  
~ / s Enter number or dial number  
from the directory (page 32).  
f ¢Calls List: (2)  
c
Press the talk key. Both num-  
bers are dialled.  
q
c
Select entry.  
Briefly press/press and hold  
the talk key. The number is  
dialled using the selected con-  
nection type (page 20).  
35  
           
SMS (text messages)  
Rules  
SMS (text messages)  
u For more than 160 characters, or large  
picture files, the SMS will be sent as a  
linked SMS (up to eight SMS messages  
each containing 152 or 153 characters,  
depending on the length of the linking  
information).  
You can only send and receive SMS mes-  
sages via the fixed network.  
When an SMS is sent, the base station  
automatically establishes a connection via  
the fixed network.  
The following will be shown on the top  
right in the header when an SMS is  
being written (example):  
Your unit is supplied ready for sending  
SMS messages immediately.  
1
Preconditions:  
SMS  
1170(2)  
2
u Calling Line Identification is enabled for  
your fixed network connection.  
1 Maximum number of characters you  
can still write or attach  
2 Number of SMS messages that need to  
be linked for the text written so far.  
u Your network provider supports SMS in  
the fixed network (information on this  
can be obtained from your network  
provider).  
u You are registered with your service  
provider to send and receive SMS mes-  
sages.  
Please note that linking SMS messages usually  
incurs higher charges.  
SMS messages are exchanged between  
SMS centres that are operated by service  
providers. You must enter the SMS centre  
through which you wish to send and  
receive SMS messages into your phone.  
You can receive SMS from every SMS cen-  
tre that is entered, provided you have reg-  
istered with your service provider.  
Please note:  
u If your phone is connected to a PABX,  
please read page 43.  
u To receive text messages you must be  
registered with your service provider.  
Registering with the registration  
assistant  
Your SMS messages are sent via the  
Service Centr. that is entered as the  
active send service centre. However,  
you can select any other SMS centre as the  
active send service centre to send a cur-  
rent message (page 42).  
The first time you open the v ¢ î  
Messaging ¢ SMS menu you will be asked  
whether you wish to be registered auto-  
matically will all entered SMS centres (see  
page 42). Confirm with §Yes§. You can now  
receive SMS messages from all SMS cen-  
tres whose numbers you have entered.  
If no SMS Service Centre is entered,  
the SMS menu only contains the entry  
Settings. Enter an SMS Service Centre  
(page 42).  
You can call up automatic registration  
thereafter via the menu:  
Precondition: SMS centres have been  
entered.  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
¢Subscribe to SMS  
The registration assistant does not sup-  
port setting up personal mailboxes  
(page 41).  
36  
           
SMS (text messages)  
Using other functions  
Writing/sending an SMS  
Precondition: you are writing a text mes-  
sage.  
Writing an SMS  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
Mailbox 2 Select mailbox if necessary  
The following functions can be selected  
and press §OK§ (page 41).  
with q:  
~
Enter mailbox PIN if necessary  
and press §OK§.  
Send  
Send an SMS.  
New SMS Select and press §OK§.  
Predef. Sound  
Insert ringer tone.  
~
Write an SMS.  
Predef. Picture  
§Options§  
Send  
SMS  
Press the display key.  
Select and press §OK§.  
Select and press §OK§.  
Insert a picture.  
Predictive Text  
Activate/deactivate predictive text  
EATONI, page 102.  
Sending an SMS  
Select Language  
s / C / ~  
For EATONI: select the language in  
which you wish to write the text and  
press §OK§.  
Select number with area code  
(even if you are in that area)  
from the directory or call-by-  
call list, or enter number  
SMS status report  
directly. For SMS to an SMS  
mailbox: add the mailbox ID to  
the end of the number.  
Precondition: Your network provider sup-  
ports this feature.  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
If you have activated the status report, you  
will receive an SMS with a confirmation  
message after sending.  
Send  
Select and press §OK§. The SMS  
will be sent as soon as your  
phone's fixed network connec-  
tion is free.  
Activating/deactivating a status report  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
Please note:  
Status Report  
If you are interrupted by an external call  
while writing an SMS, the text is automati-  
cally saved in the draft message list.  
If the memory is full, or if the SMS function  
on the base station is being used by  
another handset, the operation is can-  
celled. An appropriate message appears in  
the display. Delete SMS messages you no  
longer require or send the SMS later.  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
¤ Open the incoming message list  
(page 39) and then:  
q
Select SMS with the State OK or  
State not OK status.  
§Read§  
Or:  
Press the display key.  
§Delete§  
Press the display key. The SMS  
is deleted.  
37  
           
SMS (text messages)  
You have the following options:  
Draft message list  
New SMS  
You can save an SMS in the draft message  
list and edit and send it later.  
Write a new SMS and then send  
(page 37) or save it.  
Saving an SMS in the draft message list  
Edit  
Edit the text of the saved SMS and then  
send (page 37).  
¤ You are writing an SMS (page 37).  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Character Set  
Save  
Select and press §OK§.  
Text is shown in the selected character  
set.  
Please note:  
After saving, the SMS editor with your SMS will  
be displayed again. You can continue writing  
the text and save it again. The SMS that was  
saved previously will be overwritten.  
Deleting draft message list  
¤ Open the draft message list and then:  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
Delete all Select, press §OK§ and confirm  
Opening the draft message list  
with §Yes§. The list is cleared.  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
¢(mailbox, mailbox PIN)  
Outgoing (3)  
Sending SMS messages to an e-mail  
address  
Select and press §OK§. The  
number of the SMS messages  
in the list will be shown in  
brackets (e.g. (3)).  
If your service provider supports the SMS  
to e-mail feature, you can also send your  
SMS messages to e-mail addresses.  
The first list entry is displayed, e.g.:  
1234567890  
The e-mail address must be at the begin-  
ning of the text. You must send the SMS to  
the e-mail service of your SMS send cen-  
21.09.05 09:45  
tvre. ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢  
Reading or deleting individual SMS  
messages  
(mailbox, mailbox PIN) ¢New SMS  
¤ Open the draft message list and then:  
~
Enter the e-mail address. End  
the entry with a space or colon  
(depending on the service pro-  
vider).  
q
Select SMS.  
§Read§  
Press the display key. The  
entry will be displayed. Scroll  
line by line using q.  
~
Enter the SMS text.  
Press the display key.  
Select and press §OK§.  
Or:  
§Options§  
Send  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
Delete Entry Press §OK§. The SMS is deleted.  
E-mail  
Select and press §OK§ If the  
number of the e-mail service is  
not entered (page 42), enter  
the number of the e-mail serv-  
ice.  
Writing/editing an SMS  
¤ You are reading an SMS in the draft  
message list.  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
§Send§  
Press the display key. The SMS  
will be sent as soon as your  
phone's fixed network connec-  
tion is free.  
38  
         
SMS (text messages)  
An entry in the list is displayed e.g. as fol-  
lows:  
Receiving an SMS  
All received SMS messages are saved in  
the incoming message list. Linked SMS  
messages are displayed as one message. If  
this is too long (it consists of more than 8  
linked individual SMS messages) or if it  
was not fully transmitted, it will be split  
into several individual SMS messages.  
1
1234567890  
21.09.05 09:45  
2
1 Number of the sender or name of the direc-  
tory entry  
2 SMS status:  
bold: new unread SMS messages  
regular: old read SMS messages  
Since an SMS remains in the list even after  
it has been read, you should regularly  
delete SMS messages from the list.  
Opening the incoming message list via the  
SMS menu  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS  
¢(mailbox, mailbox PIN)  
¢Incoming (2)  
The display tells you if the SMS memory is  
full.  
¤ Deleting SMS messages you no longer  
Reading or deleting individual SMS  
messages  
require (page 39).  
Incoming message list  
¤ Continue as described at "Reading or  
deleting individual SMS messages",  
page 38.  
The incoming message list contains:  
u All received SMS messages, starting  
with the most recent  
A new SMS which you have read receives  
the status Old.  
u SMS messages that could not be sent  
due to an error  
Changing the character set  
u SMS status messages, if the status  
¤ Read the SMS (page 39):  
report is activated (page 37).  
If you cannot see any text or symbols, the  
SMS may have been written with a differ-  
ent character set.  
New SMS messages are signalled on all  
Gigaset S45 handsets by the À icon in the  
display, the flashing message key f  
and an advisory tone.  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Character Set  
Select and press §OK§.  
Opening the incoming message list with  
the f key  
q
Select character set and press  
§OK§.  
f
Press.  
Select mailbox if necessary and enter mail-  
box PIN.  
Text is shown in the selected character set.  
The incoming message list is displayed as  
follows (example):  
Deleting incoming message list  
All new and old SMS messages in the list  
are deleted.  
1
SMS:  
(2)  
2
¤ Open the incoming message list.  
1 Number of entries in the list.  
2 Name of mailbox, here: general mailbox  
§Options§  
¤ To continue, see "Deleting draft mes-  
Open list with §OK§.  
sage list", page 38.  
39  
               
SMS (text messages)  
Dialling numbers from SMS texts/  
transferring to the directory  
Replying to or forwarding text  
messages  
¤ Read SMS (page 39) and scroll to the  
¤ Read the SMS (page 39):  
telephone number.  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
The digits are reverse-highlighted.  
You have the following options:  
c
Press the talk key to dial the  
number.  
Reply  
Write and send a reply SMS directly  
(page 37).  
Or:  
Ó
Press the display key to trans-  
fer the number to the direc-  
tory.  
Edit  
Edit the text in the SMS and then send  
it (page 37). Attachments (e.g. pic-  
tures, melodies) are not sent.  
The directory is opened.  
New Entry Press §OK§ to confirm.  
Forwarding an SMS  
The highlighted number will be trans-  
ferred into the Number : field. For further  
information, see page 30.  
¤ You are reading an SMS (page 39):  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Forward  
Select and press §OK§. For fur-  
ther information, see page 37.  
Please note:  
The + symbol is not transferred for interna-  
tional dialling codes.  
Attachments are forwarded. If a service  
provider does not permit the forwarding  
of attachments:  
¥
You should then enter '00' at the start of  
the number.  
If an SMS contains several numbers, the  
next number will be highlighted if you  
scroll down until the first number disap-  
pears from the display.  
¤ Select Edit to forward the SMS without  
¤ aCtotnacfihrmmethnets.prompt New SMS will not  
contain picture/ melody. Continue? with  
§Yes§.  
If you wish to use the number to send an  
SMS:  
Accept number in the directory  
¤ Save the number with the area code  
(dialling code) in the directory.  
¤ Open incoming message list and select  
entry (page 39).  
§Options§  
Press the display key. For fur-  
ther information, see page 32.  
Please note:  
You can create a special directory for SMS  
messages within your main directory by  
putting a star (*) before the names.  
An attached mail box identifier is added to  
the directory. They must be deleted for 'nor-  
mal calls'.  
40  
     
SMS (text messages)  
Notification by SMS  
SMS mailboxes  
You can arrange to be notified about  
missed calls by SMS.  
The General Mailbox is the default set-  
ting. Anyone can access this mailbox and  
it cannot be protected by a PIN. You can  
additionally set up three personal mail-  
boxes and protect these with a PIN. Each  
mailbox is identified by a name and a  
'Mailbox ID' (a kind of extension number).  
Precondition: For missed calls, the caller's  
number (CLI) must have been transmit-  
ted.  
Notification is sent to your mobile phone  
or another phone with SMS functionality.  
Please note:  
You only need to set the phone number to  
which notification should be sent (notifi-  
cation number) and the notification type.  
u If you operate a number of devices  
(base stations) with SMS functionality  
on a single phone line, then each SMS  
mailbox ID may only occur once. In this  
case you must also change the preset  
ID of the general mailbox ('0').  
Please note that your network provider will  
usually charge for SMS notifications.  
Svtor¢ingîtheMneostsifaicgiantgio¢n nSuMmSbe¢r Settings  
u You can only use personal mailboxes if  
your service provider supports this  
function. You can tell whether this is  
the case by the addition of a star (*) to  
the number of a (preset) SMS centre.  
¢Notify Number  
~
Enter the number (including  
dialling code) to which the  
SMS is to be sent.  
u If you have forgotten your mailbox PIN,  
you can reset it by restoring the base  
station's default settings. This will  
delete all SMS messages from all  
mailboxes.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
Warning:  
Do not enter your own fixed network number  
for the notification of missed calls. This can  
lead to chargeable endless looping.  
Setting up and changing a personal  
mailbox  
Setting the notification type  
Setting up a personal mailbox  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
¢Notify Type  
¢SMS Mailboxes  
Missed Calls:  
s
Select a mailbox,  
¤ SSeavteOnchifanyoguesre(pqaugiree1S0M1S).notification.  
e.g. Mailbox 2, and press §OK§.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
On/Off:  
Activate or deactivate mailbox.  
ID:  
Select mailbox ID (0–9). You can only  
select the available numbers.  
Protection:  
Activate/deactivate PIN protection.  
PIN  
¤ ISfanveeccehsasanrgye,se(nptaegr e4-1d0ig1i)t.PIN.  
41  
                   
SMS (text messages)  
Active mailboxes are marked with ½ in the  
mailbox list. They are shown in the SMS  
list and can, if necessary, be displayed by  
pressing the message key f.  
Setting SMS centre  
Entering/changing SMS centres  
¤ You should find out about the services  
and special functions offered by your  
service provider before you make a  
new application and/or before you  
delete pre-configured call numbers.  
Deactivating a mailbox  
¤ Set On/Off: to Off. Confirm message with  
§Yes§ if necessary.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
All SMS messages saved in this mailbox  
will be deleted.  
v ¢î Messaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
¢Service Centres  
s
Select SMS centre (e.g. Service  
Deactivating PIN protection  
¤ Set Protection: to Off.  
Centr. 1) and press §OK§.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
The mailbox PIN is reset to '0000'.  
Active Send:  
Changing the name of a mailbox  
Select Yes if the text messages are to be  
sent via the SMS centre. For the SMS  
centres 2 to 4, the setting only applies  
to the next SMS.  
v ¢îMessaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
¢SMS Mailboxes ¢sSS  
(Select mailbox)  
SMS:  
§Edit§  
~
Press the display key.  
Enter new name.  
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the  
number of the SMS service and insert a  
star if your service provider supports  
personal mailboxes.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
Press and hold (idle status).  
a
E-mail:  
Changing a mailbox's PIN and ID  
Press the display key §Edit§. Enter the  
number of the e-mail service.  
v ¢îMessaging ¢SMS ¢Settings  
¢SMS Mailboxes ¢sSS  
(Select mailbox)  
¤ Save changes (page 101).  
Please note:  
~
Enter mailbox PIN if required  
und press §OK§.  
Ask your service provider for details on how to  
enter service numbers if you wish to use per-  
sonal mailboxes (precondition: your service  
provider supports this function).  
¤ Set ID:, Protection: and PIN (page 41).  
Sending an SMS to a personal mailbox  
Sending an SMS through another SMS  
centre  
To send an SMS to a personal mailbox, the  
sender must know your ID and enter it  
after your number.  
¤ Activate the SMS centre (2 to 4) as  
¤ SacetnivdetsheendSMseSrv.ice centre.  
¤ You can send your SMS contact an SMS  
via your personal mailbox.  
Your SMS contact will receive your SMS  
number with current ID and can save it in  
their directory. If the ID is invalid, the SMS  
will not be delivered.  
This setting only applies to the next SMS  
to be sent. Thereafter, the setting returns  
to Service Centr. 1.  
42  
             
SMS (text messages)  
SMS on a PABX  
SMS troubleshooting  
u You can only receive an SMS when the  
Calling Line Identification is for-  
warded to the extension of the PABX  
(CLIP). The CLIP of the phone number  
for the SMS centre is evaluated in your  
Gigaset.  
Error codes when sending  
E0 Calling Line Identification permanently  
withheld (CLIR) or Calling Line  
Identification not activated.  
FE Error occurred during SMS transfer.  
FD Connection to SMS centre failed, see self-  
help.  
u If required, you must prefix the number  
for the SMS centre with the access code  
(depending on your PABX).  
Self-help with errors  
If in doubt, test your PABX, e.g. by  
sending an SMS to your own number:  
once with and once without the access  
code.  
The following table lists error situations  
and possible causes and provides notes on  
troubleshooting.  
u When you send SMS messages, your  
sender number may be sent without  
your extension number. In this case the  
recipient cannot reply to you directly.  
Sending and receiving SMS on ISDN  
PABXs is only possible via the MSN  
number assigned to your base station.  
Activating/deactivating  
SMS function  
If you deactivate the SMS function, you  
cannot send or receive SMS messages  
with your phone.  
The settings which you have made for  
sending and receiving SMS messages (e.g.  
the call numbers of the SMS centres) and  
the entries in the incoming and draft mes-  
sage lists are saved even after you switch  
off your phone.  
v
Open menu.  
5 5 O 2 L  
Enter the digits.  
Q §OK§ Deactivate SMS function.  
Or:  
1 §OK§  
Activate SMS function (default  
settings).  
43  
             
SMS (text messages)  
You cannot send messages.  
The message is played back.  
1. You have not requested the CLIP service  
(Calling Line Identification Presentation).  
1. The 'display call number' service is not acti-  
vated.  
¥
Ask your service provider to enable this  
service.  
¥
Ask your service provider to activate this  
function (chargeable).  
2. SMS transfer was interrupted (e.g. by an  
incoming call).  
2. Mobile phone operator and fixed network  
SMS service provider have not agreed on a  
cooperation.  
¥
Re-send the SMS.  
¥
Obtain information from your fixed net-  
work SMS service provider.  
3. Network provider does not support this  
feature.  
3. Your terminal is recorded by your SMS pro-  
vider as having no fixed network SMS func-  
tionality, i.e. you are no longer registered  
with the provider.  
4. No number or an invalid number is entered  
for the SMS centre set as the active send  
service centre.  
¥
Enter the number (page 42).  
¥
Start the registration assistant for auto-  
matic registration (see page 36).  
You receive an incomplete SMS.  
1. Your phone's memory is full.  
Have the device (re-)registered to  
receive SMS messages.  
¥
Delete old SMS messages (page 39).  
Messages are only received during the day.  
2. The provider has not yet sent the rest of the  
message.  
1. The terminal is recorded in your SMS pro-  
vider's database as having no fixed network  
SMS functionality, i.e. you are no longer  
registered with the provider.  
You have stopped receiving SMS messages.  
1. You have changed the ID of your mailbox.  
¥
¥
Start the registration assistant for auto-  
matic registration (see page 36).  
Have the device (re-)registered to  
receive SMS messages (see above).  
¥
Give your SMS contacts your new ID or  
undo the change (page 42).  
2. You have not activated your mailbox.  
Activate your mailbox (page 42).  
¥
3. Call forwarding is activated with When: All  
Calls or the call forwarding All Calls is acti-  
vated for the network mailbox.  
¥
Change the call forwarding.  
44  
E-mail notifications  
Entering access data for the  
incoming e-mail server  
E-mail notifications  
Your phone will notify you when new e-  
mail messages have been received on  
your incoming e-mail server.  
For the handset to check for new e-mails,  
you must save the address of your Internet  
service provider's incoming e-mail server  
and the username and password for  
access to your mailbox on the phone.  
Your Internet provider will supply you with  
this information.  
It periodically connects to the e-mail  
server (around every 15 minutes) and  
checks for any new messages.  
Any new messages that have been  
received are displayed on all Gigaset S45  
handsets that have been registered: you  
will hear an advisory tone, the message  
key f will flash and symbol À will be  
displayed in the idle display.  
Please note:  
For how to make the setting using the  
Web configurator, see page 91.  
Entering the incoming e-mail server  
Please note:  
v ¢î Messaging ¢E-mail ¢Settings  
The symbol À is also displayed if new SMS  
messages or messenger messages have been  
received.  
¢Incoming (POP3)  
¤ Enter the name of the incoming e-mail  
server (POP3 server) (max. 74 charac-  
If new e-mail messages have been received,  
pressing the message key f will display  
them in list E-mail: .  
¤ Steerlse)c.tE§Oxaptmionpsle§ ¢: poSpa.vteheasnedrvperre.cssom§OK.§.  
You can use your phone to connect to the  
incoming e-mail server and display the  
sender, date and time of receipt and sub-  
ject for every e-mail message in the list of  
incoming mail (page 46).  
Entering access data  
v ¢î Messaging ¢E-mail ¢Settings  
¢Registration  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Username:  
Preconditions:  
Enter the user name (account name)  
agreed with the Internet provider  
(max. 32 characters).  
u You have set up an e-mail account with  
an Internet provider.  
u The incoming e-mail server uses the  
Authent. Password:  
POP3 protocol.  
Enter the password that you agreed  
with your provider for accessing the  
incoming e-mail server (max. 32 char-  
u You have stored the name of the  
incoming e-mail server and your per-  
sonal access data (account name, pass-  
word) in the phone (page 45).  
¤ aPrcetessrst;hceasdeisspelanysiktievye)§S.ave§ to save  
entries.  
The characters will be displayed as entered  
when you enter your password, as long as  
the cursor is on this line. Thereafter, the  
password will be replaced by a row of  
asterisks for security reasons.  
45  
                       
E-mail notifications  
Opening the incoming  
e-mail server  
Please note:  
Many e-mail providers operate standard spam  
protection measures. E-mail messages classi-  
fied as spam are stored in a separate folder and  
are therefore not shown on the list of incom-  
ing mail.  
v ¢î Messaging ¢E-mail ¢Inbox  
Or if new e-mail messages have been  
Some e-mail providers allow you to deactivate  
spam protection or show spam e-mails on the  
list of incoming mail.  
Other e-mail providers may send a message to  
the Inbox when a new spam e-mail is received.  
This is to inform you that a suspected spam e-  
mail has been received.  
Date and sender of this mail are repeatedly  
updated, so that it is always displayed as a new  
message.  
received (the message key f is flash-  
ifng): ¢E-mail:  
The phone will connect to the incoming e-  
mail server. A list of e-mail messages that  
are stored there will be displayed.  
New unread messages appear above old  
read messages. The most recent entry is at  
the head of the list.  
Messages when establishing a connection  
The name or e-mail address of the sender  
(one line, abbreviated if necessary) is  
shown along with the date and time for  
every e-mail (the date and time only have  
correct values if the sender and recipient  
are located in the same time zone).  
The following problems may occur when  
connecting to the incoming e-mail server.  
The messages are displayed in the hand-  
set's display for a few seconds.  
Server not accessible!  
The connection to the incoming e-mail  
server could not be established. This  
may have the following causes:  
Example display:  
Inbox  
Susi Sorglos  
1
– Incorrect entry for name of incom-  
ing e-mail server  
29.11.06  
12:20  
2
– Temporary problems with the  
incoming e-mail server (server is  
down or is not connected to the  
Louise Miller  
29.11.06  
11:15  
¤ ICnhteecrnkeste)t.tings (page 45).  
From  
Subject  
¤ Try again later.  
1 E-mail address or name transmitted by the  
sender  
Bold: New message.  
2 Date and time of receipt of e-mail message  
Currently not possible!  
The resources your phone requires to  
make the connection are busy, e.g.:  
If the incoming message list on the incom-  
ing e-mailserver is empty, No entries will be  
displayed.  
– Three VoIP connections have already  
been made  
– Another handset is currently con-  
nected to the incoming e-mail  
¤ sTeryrvaegr.ain later.  
46  
         
E-mail notifications  
Log-in failed!  
Error during login to incoming e-mail  
server. This may have the following  
cause:  
– Incorrect entries for name of incom-  
ing e-mail server, user name and/or  
password.  
¤ Check settings (page 45).  
Mailbox settings incomplete!  
Incorrect entries for name of incoming  
e-mail server, user name and/or pass-  
word.  
¤ Check settings and complete if nec-  
essary (page 45).  
View the message header of an e-mail  
Precondition: You have opened the  
incoming mail list (page 46).  
q
Select e-mail entry.  
Press the display key.  
§Subject§  
The subject of the e-mail message will be  
displayed (max. 120 characters).  
Press the display key to return  
to the incoming message list.  
View e-mail sender's address  
Precondition: You have opened the  
incoming mail list (page 46).  
q
Select e-mail entry.  
Press the display key.  
§From§  
The sender's e-mail address is shown in  
full.  
Press the display key to return  
to the incoming message list.  
Example:  
From  
Susi.Sorglos@mailp  
rov.com  
Ý
Options  
47  
   
Messenger  
u Exchange messages with your buddies.  
Your handset notifies you about new  
messages with a flashing message key  
f and a beep.  
Messenger  
The messenger in your handset enables  
instant messaging (immediate message  
transfer, chatting). The phone supports  
the XMPP messenger (Jabber).  
u Call your buddies directly from your  
buddy list (page 54).  
Requirements for instant messaging:  
Instant messaging refers to communica-  
tion between 'friends' on the Internet.  
Subscribers exchange short messages  
which are forwarded immediately. This  
gives rise to a flowing 'conversation' simi-  
lar to chatting.  
u You have registered with an instant  
messaging provider via the Web  
browser on your PC and (optionally)  
agreed a Web name (nickname).  
u You have created a buddy list via the  
The precondition for this form of commu-  
nication is that both subscribers have a  
connection to the messenger server of  
the same instant messaging provider.  
Therefore, both subscribers must be  
'online'. The messenger server forwards  
the messages to the recipient.  
messenger client on the PC.  
u You have saved the messenger server  
address and your access data for the  
messenger server (user ID, password)  
in the phone using the Web configura-  
tor (page 90). The phone needs the  
data to establish a connection with the  
messenger server.  
The subscribers to instant messaging are  
called buddies.  
Please note:  
Most messenger servers allow you to cre-  
ate what are known as buddy lists. You  
can store the buddies you want to chat to  
in the buddy list.  
If your instant messaging provider doesn't sup-  
port the phone's messenger client, then you  
can open an account with an open Jabber  
server and use the Web configurator to enter  
its address in your phone. Many of these Jab-  
ber servers offer gateways to other messenger  
servers (e.g. AOL, ICQ, MSN, Yahoo!).  
You can find a list of Jabber servers and an  
overview of the gateways to other messenger  
servers on the Internet at  
The messenger server informs you as soon  
as one of your buddies comes online or  
goes offline. Offline means that the  
buddy has disconnected from the messen-  
ger server.  
http://www.jabber.org.  
In addition to this, each buddy can deter-  
mine their own (communication) status  
(state of presence, see page 50), from  
which buddies can tell whether they are in  
the mood to chat or wish to remain undis-  
turbed.  
You can find information on setting up a Jab-  
ber account with connections from ICQ, MSN  
or Yahoo on the Internet, e.g. at :  
http://web.swissjabber.ch  
The Web configurator on your phone gives  
you the following options:  
u Go online (page 49).  
u Display the list of your contacts (bud-  
dies) on the handset that you previ-  
ously created on the PC. This will indi-  
cate for each buddy whether they are  
available (online) and ready to chat  
(state of presence, see page 50).  
48  
                   
Messenger  
You remain online until you set your status  
to Offline (page 50) or the connection to  
the messenger server is terminated  
(page 54).  
Establishing a connection,  
going online  
When you go online, your buddy list will  
be displayed on the handset and you will  
receive messages from your buddies.  
You also remain online if you press the end  
call key a.  
If the connection cannot be established,  
you will receive an appropriate message.  
Please try again later (page 54).  
Only one of the handsets connected to the  
base station can connect to the messen-  
ger server. You can then only 'chat' on this  
handset.  
Please note:  
An external call will interrupt the 'chat',  
but you will still be online. You can con-  
tinue your chat after you end or reject the  
call.  
You can also assign the messenger to one of  
the display keys on your handset (page 62).  
The connection is established when you press  
the display key.  
Precondition: You have saved the mes-  
senger server address and your access  
data for the messenger server (user ID and  
password) in the phone using the Web  
configurator (page 90).  
Lost connection  
If your phone loses its connection to the  
messenger server, the display key f  
will flash on the handset that had been  
connected to the messenger. In idle status  
it will display "Messenger connection failed!".  
All messages that you previously had  
received, as well as any message you were  
currently writing, will be saved.  
v ¢ î Messaging ¢Messenger  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
The phone attempts to establish a connec-  
tion. You are informed about the status of  
the connection by messages on the dis-  
play.  
Reconnecting:  
f
Press the message key.  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
If the connection can be established, you  
are Online . The display will show the sub-  
menu for your messenger. You can open  
your buddy list, send and receive mes-  
sages and call your buddies.  
The phone will attempt to reconnect. You  
are informed about the status of the con-  
nection by messages on the display.  
The following is displayed when the hand-  
set is in idle status:  
If you reply to the request with §No§ the  
phone will behave as during regular dis-  
connection. All messenger messages will  
be deleted. The phone is offline.  
Ð
V
INT 1  
%
19.09.06  
12:00  
FixedLine  
IP  
49  
     
Messenger  
Cvha¢nginîg sMteastsuasging ¢Messenger  
Changing/checking your  
personal status, going offline  
¢User Status ¢Change Status  
You want to log off (go offline) or let your  
buddies know whether you wish to chat or  
would prefer to remain undisturbed.  
s
a
Select status and press §OK§  
(½ = on).  
Press and hold if necessary  
You have the following options:  
(idle status).  
Offline  
You log off from the messenger server.  
The messenger server informs your  
buddies that you are no longer avail-  
able.  
Disconnect, go offline  
¤ Select Offline status, and respond  
§Yes§.to the security prompt.  
The connection to the messenger server  
will be terminated. The handset returns to  
idle status. New messenger messages are  
no longer sent to you. The messenger  
message list is deleted. The buddy list is no  
longer available.  
The handset switches to idle status.  
You can neither send nor receive mes-  
sages.  
Online  
(Setting after successful connection)  
You are logged on to the messenger  
server and can send and receive mes-  
sages.  
Please note:  
Whether messages directed to you are deleted  
or stored in the messenger server depends on  
the provider. Stored messages are sent to you  
when you go online again.  
Ready for chat  
You are Online and can send and  
receive messages.  
You invite your buddies to 'chat' with  
you.  
Cvhe¢ckinîg yMoeusrsasgtiantgu¢s aMnedssuesnegrerID  
Away / Extended Away / Do not disturb  
You are Online and can send and  
receive messages. You inform your  
buddies that you currently cannot/do  
not wish to 'chat', i.e. will not reply to  
their messages immediately.  
¢User Status ¢Info  
If you are online, the following informa-  
tion may be displayed (depending on your  
provider):  
u Your Web name (nickname, abbrevi-  
ated if necessary)  
Invisible  
You are Online and can send and  
receive messages.  
u Your current status  
u Your user ID (format: userid@provider-  
However, the messenger server indi-  
cates to your buddies that you are  
Offline .  
domain; abbreviated if necessary)  
Only Offline will be displayed if you are  
offline.  
Please note:  
All status settings apart from Offline only  
inform other buddies about your communica-  
tion status. Whether this information is passed  
on to your buddies depends on the provider.  
50  
                   
Messenger  
The buddies appear on the list in the fol-  
lowing order. You can interpret their sta-  
tus by means of the colour of the % icon  
next to the buddies (page 50):  
Opening the buddy list  
Precondition: you are Online and have  
already created a buddy list (using the PC)  
ovn y¢ourîproMviedsesra'sgimnge¢ssenMgeesrsesnegrverer.  
1. Buddies with Online status or Ready for  
chat in alphabetical order. The % icon is  
green.  
¢ Buddies  
2. Buddies with Away , Extended Away or  
Do not disturb status in alphabetical or-  
der. The % icon is orange.  
Only the first 20 (maximum) buddies on  
the buddy list will be read by the messen-  
ger server and displayed on the handset.  
The number depends on the available  
memory space.  
3. Buddies with Offline or Invisible status in  
alphabetical order. The % icon is red.  
Please note:  
The buddies that are displayed depend on  
which buddies were transferred from the  
messenger server first.  
The buddy list will remain open until you exit it  
(press and release or press and hold a).  
The handset will not automatically return to  
idle status.  
Please note:  
You can also receive and respond to messages  
from buddies who are not on the list displayed  
on the handset.  
Changes in the status of buddies  
You have opened the buddy list and one of  
the buddies changes their status. The fol-  
lowing distinctions are made:  
Example:  
u A buddy changes to status Online /  
Buddies  
Ready for chat :  
Mark  
%
%
&
&
You are informed via a message on the  
display. The buddy list is updated.  
Julian  
Lisa  
u In the event of another status change,  
the buddy list is updated. No message  
is displayed.  
Herbert  
Chat  
Info  
Please note:  
The Web names (nicknames) of your bud-  
dies are displayed on the list. If they do not  
have a Web name, the user ID is displayed.  
If the buddy changes to Offline status, your  
messages are no longer sent to them. Whether  
the messenger server stores the messages  
until the buddy is Online again or deletes them  
depends on the provider.  
If the name of a buddy is longer than one  
line, it will be abbreviated. You can navi-  
gate the list with the control key q.  
51  
     
Messenger  
The messages are stored in the Messenger:  
message list.  
Requesting information about buddies  
You have opened the buddy list (page 51).  
Please note:  
The list messenger is only displayed if you are  
online.  
q
Select buddy..  
§Info§  
Press the display key.  
The display depends on the provider.  
Example:  
Opening the message list using the  
f key  
Info  
The message key flashes.  
¤ Press the message key f.  
Julian  
1
2
3
Online  
¤ Select list Messenger: (2) if required and  
press §OK§. The number in brackets indi-  
cates the number of new messages.  
Julian.Reeves@jabbe  
r.com  
Ý
Chat  
Please note:  
If you are in the messenger menu or one of its  
submenus/text editors and you press the flash-  
ing message key f, this will open the mes-  
senger list directly.  
1 Web name (nickname, abbreviated if neces-  
sary)  
2 Status  
3 User ID (format: userid@provider-domain;  
abbreviated if necessary). (Resource names  
are not displayed.)  
To open the message list from the menu:  
In the handset idle status:  
If the buddy changes their status the entry  
is updated.  
v ¢î Messaging ¢Messenger  
Press to return to your buddy list. Press  
¢ Messages  
§Chat§ if you want to 'chat' with the buddy.  
Select and press §OK§.  
Chatting to buddies  
Message list  
The messages on the list are sorted chron-  
ologically, with the oldest message at the  
head of the list.  
You want to 'chat' to a buddy, i.e. send a  
message.  
Precondition: you have opened the  
buddy list (page 51) and selected a buddy  
with q.  
Example of a list display:  
Messenger  
¤ Press the display key §Chat§. The text edi-  
Julian  
1
¤ tWorritiseoapnednseedn.d your message  
20.10.06  
15:25  
2
INFO message  
20.10.06  
(page 53).  
3
15:30  
Read  
The buddy list is shown again.  
Delete  
1 Sender's Web name/user ID  
Bold: new/unread message  
2 Date and time of message  
3 Message from the messenger server  
(page 53)  
Receiving messages  
Precondition: you are online.  
Newly arrived buddy or info messages  
(page 53) are indicated by a flashing mes-  
sage key f and a beep, even if you are  
in a messenger menu or text editor.  
If the memory is full and new messages  
arrive, the oldest message(s) will be over-  
written. If there are not old (read) mes-  
sages, the oldest (unread) messages will  
be overwritten.  
52  
             
Messenger  
Message types  
Writing and sending messages  
In instant messaging, a distinction is made  
between the following types of message:  
Precondition:  
u You are reading a buddy's message and  
u Buddy messages are the 'instant mes-  
sages' you receive from your buddies.  
You can answer the messages.  
press the display key §Answer§ or  
u You have pressed the display key §Chat§  
in the buddy list or the buddy profiles.  
u Info messages are special information  
from the provider. They are forwarded  
to you, but you cannot reply to them.  
A text editor is opened.  
¤ Use the handset keys to enter a mes-  
sage (max. 612 characters, EATONI pre-  
Example: With some messaging pro-  
viders you receive an info message  
when another subscriber tries to add  
you to their buddy list. You are  
prompted to check the messages on  
the messenger client on your PC.  
¤ dSeiclteicvte§Mteexntis¢avSaeilnadblaen,dpapgrees1s0§O2K)§..  
The message is sent to the buddy.  
If the messenger server is unable to send  
the message to the buddy, a message will  
be displayed.  
Via the messenger client on your PC  
you can agree to the action or refuse  
permission. Without your agreement,  
the other subscriber cannot add you to  
their buddy list.  
¤ Confirm the message by clicking on  
§OK§.  
The text-editor will re-open with your  
message. You can then retry sending the  
message.  
Reading messages  
Precondition: You have opened the mes-  
sage list and selected a message with s.  
Interruption while writing  
¤ Press the display key §Read§.  
If you receive a call while you are writing a  
message or the connection to the messen-  
ger server is interrupted, the text editor is  
terminated. Your message is stored tem-  
porarily until ...  
The message is opened for you to read.  
You have the following options:  
§Delete§  
Delete a message from the list  
You will return to the message  
list.  
u ... you start up a chat with the same  
buddy (page 52). The text editor is  
opened with the stored text. You can  
finish writing the message and send it.  
Or:  
§Answer§  
(for buddy messages only)  
editor is opened. You can write  
a reply (see "Writing and send-  
ing messages" on page 53).  
u ... you wish to write a message to  
another buddy. The stored text is  
deleted. The text editor is empty.  
u ... you go offline. The text is deleted.  
Or:  
Menu options for the text editor  
By pressing §Menu§ within the text editor  
you have the following options:  
a
Back to the message list.  
Deleting a message  
Precondition: You have opened the mes-  
Send  
sage list and selected a message with s.  
Send message to buddy.  
¤ Press the display key §Delete§.  
Delete Text  
Delete the whole text.  
53  
             
Messenger  
Predictive Text  
Self-help with errors  
Activate/deactivate predictive text, see  
page 102.  
While establishing a connection to the  
messenger server, during connection and  
when sending messages the following  
errors may occur.  
Select Language  
For predictive text: select the language  
in which you wish to write the text and  
press §OK§.  
Behaviour when the connection is lost  
Calling a buddy  
If the connection to the messenger server  
is interrupted, an appropriate message is  
shown in the display. You are Offline .  
You can call a buddy directly.  
Precondition: the messenger server sup-  
ports calls using vCard and your buddy's  
vCard contains a phone number.  
If you are in a submenu of the messenger,  
the handset switches to the messenger  
menu.  
¤ Try to re-establish the connection  
Preconditions:  
(page 49).  
u You have opened the buddy list and  
selected a buddy  
Errors when sending  
or  
u You have opened the buddy's profile  
If it is not possible to send a message, a  
distinction is made between the following  
situations:  
or  
u You have opened the Messenger: list  
and selected a buddy  
u The connection to the messenger  
or  
server is interrupted:  
u You are reading a message from a  
A message is shown in the display to  
indicate that the connection to the  
messenger server has been inter-  
rupted.  
buddy  
c / d Press and release/hold the  
talk or handsfree key.  
The message is stored temporarily  
The phone will try to establish a VoIP/fixed  
network connection.  
¤ Try to re-establish the connection  
(page 49) and send the message  
again.  
The first number that is found on the  
vCard will be dialled.  
Ending a call  
u The server is unable to send the mes-  
sage:  
a
Press the end call key.  
A message is shown in the display to  
indicate that the message could not be  
sent. If, for example, the buddy is not  
available, the message you have sent  
The message is stored temporarily  
(page 53).  
¤ If necessary, check the buddy's user  
ID and send the message again later.  
54  
             
Using the network mailbox  
Network Mailb.  
Using the network mailbox  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
~
Enter the number for the net-  
work mailbox.  
Some fixed network providers and VoIP  
providers offer answering machines on  
the network – network mailboxes.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
You can use the relevant network mailbox  
if you have requested it from your fixed  
network or VoIP provider.  
Fast access is automatically activated.  
The setting for fast access applies to all  
Gigaset S45 handsets.  
The network mailbox only answers incom-  
ing calls made via the relevant line (fixed  
network or VoIP). To record all calls, you  
should therefore set up network mail-  
boxes for both fixed network and VoIP.  
Please note:  
If no number has been entered: press and  
hold 1 to enter the number.  
To deactivate fast access, you must delete  
the number.  
Please note:  
You can only set up fast access to one of the  
network mailboxes.  
Calling the network mailbox  
1
Press and hold. You are con-  
nected straight to the network  
mailbox.  
You can assign speed dial numbers to the  
number for another network mailbox in the  
directory (e.g. the 2 key) (page 30).  
You must assign the speed dial numbers to  
every handset that is registered.  
d
If necessary, press the hands-  
free key. You hear the network  
mailbox announcement.  
Configuring the network mailbox  
for fast access  
Please note:  
If you have set an automatic area code  
(page 87), the area code is also prefixed to the  
number of the network answer machine if it  
does not start with 0 and is dialled via VoIP.  
If the phone number for your network provider  
does not begin with 0, ask your VoIP provider.  
A network mailbox can frequently be accessed  
via an alternative phone number (with dialling  
code) too.  
With fast access you can dial a network  
mailbox directly.  
The network mailbox is preconfigured for  
fast access. You only need to enter the  
number of a network mailbox.  
The number is dialled via the default con-  
nection.  
Viewing the network mailbox  
report  
Tip: A fixed network answer machine  
should always be controlled via the fixed  
network connection. If VoIP is set as the  
default connection on your phone, add a  
star (*) to the end of the number of the  
network mailbox. The connection is then  
established via the fixed network.  
When a message is recorded, you receive  
a call from the network mailbox. If you  
have requested Calling Line Identification,  
the display shows the network mailbox  
number.  
Configuring the network mailbox for fast  
access and entering the network mailbox  
If you take the call, the new messages are  
played back.  
nvum¢berÐ Settings ¢Voice Mail  
If you do not take the call, the network  
mailbox number will be saved in the  
missed calls list and the message key  
flashes (page 33).  
¢Set Key 1  
55  
                     
Using several handsets  
The display shows e.g. Reg-  
str.Procedure and Base 2 flash.  
Using several handsets  
On the base station  
¤ Within 60 secs. press and hold the reg-  
istration/paging key on the base station  
(page 1) (min. 1 sec.).  
Registering handsets  
You can register up to six handsets to your  
base station.  
The handset is assigned the lowest unas-  
signed internal number (1–6). If several  
handsets are registered to the base sta-  
tion, the internal number is shown in the  
display after registration, e.g. INT 2. This  
means that the handset has been assigned  
the internal number 2.  
You can register your Gigaset S45 handset  
on up to four base stations.  
Please note:  
If there are several handsets registered to  
your base station, then you can use one to  
make a call via the Internet and the other to  
make a call via the Internet or the fixed net-  
work at the same time. A maximum of two  
internal connections can also be made.  
As a rule, all calls from a registered GAP  
handset are dialled via the connection  
types (fixed network or VoIP, see page 67)  
that have been set up as Default Line. If you  
want to establish a connection via the other  
connection type, enter a "*" (star) after the  
phone number. Example:  
Please note:  
If six handsets are already registered to the  
base station, there are two options:  
The handset with the internal number 6 is  
in idle status: the handset you wish to reg-  
ister is assigned the number 6. The handset  
that was previously number 6 is de-regis-  
tered.  
The handset with the internal number 6 is  
being used: the handset you wish to regis-  
ter cannot be registered.  
049891234567*.  
After registration, all the phone numbers  
for the phone will be assigned to the hand-  
set as receiving numbers. It will use the  
fixed network number and the first VoIP  
number as sending numbers. For how to  
change the assignments, see page 85.  
Registering other handsets on the  
Gigaset SP450 IP  
You can register other Gigaset handsets  
and handsets for other devices with GAP  
functionality as follows.  
Registering another Gigaset S45  
handset on the Gigaset SP450 IP  
On the handset  
¤ Start to register the handset as  
Before you can use your handset, you  
must register it to a base station.  
described in its user guide.  
You must initiate handset registration on  
the handset and on the base station.  
On the base station  
¤ Press and hold the registration/paging  
key on the base station (page 1)  
(min. 1 sec.).  
If the handset was registered successfully,  
the display will show the internal name for  
the handset, e.g. Int 1. If it does not, repeat  
the procedure.  
Please note:  
You can also make changes on the base station  
with a Gigaset C45 handset.  
On the handset  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Handset  
¢Register H/Set  
~
Enter the system PIN of the  
base station (the default is  
0000) and press §OK§.  
56  
       
Using several handsets  
s
Select one of the registered  
base stations or Best Base and  
press §OK§.  
De-registering handsets  
You can de-register any registered handset  
from any registered Gigaset S45 handset.  
u
Open list of internal users.  
The handset you are currently  
using is indicated by < .  
Changing a handset's internal  
number  
q
Select the handset to be de-  
registered.  
A handset is automatically assigned the  
lowest free number on registration. In the  
list of internal subscribers, the handset is  
sorted according to its internal number.  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
De-reg. H/Set No.  
Select and press §OK§.  
You can change the internal number of all  
registered handsets (1–6). Numbers 1–6  
can only be assigned once each.  
~
§Yes§  
a
Enter the base station system  
PIN (default setting: 0000).  
u
Open list of handsets. Your  
own handset is indicated by <.  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Press and hold (idle status).  
Edit H/Set No.  
Select and press §OK§. The list of  
The handset is de-registered immediately,  
even if it is not in idle status.  
handsets and their internal  
numbers will be displayed.  
The internal number for the  
first handset flashes.  
Locating a handset ("paging")  
You can locate your handset using the  
base station.  
q
~
Select handset.  
Enter the new internal number  
(1–6). The handset's old  
number is overwritten.  
¤ Press the registration/paging key on the  
¤ bAallsheasntadtsieotns (wpiallgrein1g)abtrtiehfelys.ame time  
("paging"), even if ringer tones are  
switched off.  
q ~  
If necessary, select further  
handsets and change num-  
bers.  
Ending paging  
After all the changes are completed:  
¤ Press the registration/paging key on the  
§Save§  
Press the display key to save  
the input.  
base station (page 1) briefly.  
Or  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
¤ Press talk key c on a handset.  
You will hear the error tone if an internal  
number has been allocated twice.  
Changing the base station  
¤ Repeat the procedure with a free  
number.  
If your handset is registered to more than  
one base station, you can set it to a partic-  
ular base station or to the base station  
that has the best reception (Best Base).  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Handset  
¢Select Base  
57  
                 
Using several handsets  
Transferring a call to another handset  
Changing the name of a handset  
You can forward (connect) an external  
call, made via fixed network or VoIP, to  
another handset.  
The names "INT 1", "INT 2" etc. are assigned  
automatically at registration. You can  
change these names. The changed name  
is displayed in every handset's list.  
u
The external caller hears  
music on hold if activated  
(page 66).  
u
Open list of handsets. Your  
own handset is indicated by <.  
s
§Edit§  
X
Select handset.  
s
Select a handset or Call All and  
press §OK§.  
Press the display key.  
Delete previous name if neces-  
sary.  
When the internal participant answers:  
¤ If necessary announce the external call.  
~
Enter the new name  
(max. 10 characters).  
a
Press the end call key.  
The external call is transferred to the other  
handset.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
If the internal participant does not answer  
or the line is busy, press the display key  
§End§, to return to the external call.  
Please note:  
If you delete the current handset name and  
then press §Save§ without entering a new name,  
the handset will automatically be allocated the  
standard name "INT x" (x= internal number).  
When transferring a call you can also press  
the end call key a before the internal  
participant lifts the receiver.  
Then, if the internal participant does not  
answer or the line is busy, the call will  
automatically return to you (the display  
will show Recall).  
Making internal calls  
Internal calls to other handsets registered  
on the same base station are free.  
Initiating internal consultation call,  
conference call  
Calling a specific handset  
u
~
Initiate internal call.  
You are talking to an external participant  
(via fixed network or VoIP) and can call an  
internal participant at the same time to  
hold a consultation call.  
Enter the number of the hand-  
set.  
Or:  
u
s
c
Initiate internal call.  
Select handset.  
u
The external caller hears  
music on hold if activated  
(page 66).  
Press the talk key.  
Calling all handsets ("group call")  
s
Select handset and press §OK§.  
u
Initiate internal call.  
When an internal participant answers you  
can speak to them.  
*
Press the star key. All handsets  
are called.  
You have the following options:  
Ending a call  
a
Press the end call key.  
58  
               
Using several handsets  
Ending a consultation call  
Using a handset as a  
room monitor  
§End§  
Press the display key.  
You are reconnected with the external  
subscriber.  
If the room monitor is activated, a previ-  
ously stored destination number is called  
as soon as a set noise level is reached in  
the room.  
Initiating a conference call  
§Conf.§  
Press the display key.  
You are in a three-way conference call  
with the external and the internal sub-  
scriber.  
You can store an internal or external  
number in your handset as the destination  
number.  
If the internal subscriber who has been  
called ends the call (press end call key  
a), you will be connected with the  
external subscriber. If you press end call  
key a, the external call will be trans-  
ferred to the internal subscriber.  
The room monitor call to an external  
number stops after around 90 seconds.  
The room monitor call to an internal  
number (handset) stops after around  
3 minutes (depending on the base  
station). During use as a room monitor,  
all keys are barred except for the end call  
key a. The speaker of the handset is  
muted. The end call key can only be used  
to deactivate the handset.  
Accepting/rejecting call waiting during  
an internal call  
If you get an external call while conduct-  
ing an internal call, you will hear the call  
waiting tone (short tone). With Calling  
Line Identification, the caller's number or  
name will appear in the display.  
When the room monitor is activated,  
incoming calls to the handset are indi-  
cated without a ringer tone and are only  
shown on the screen. The display and  
keypad are not illuminated and advisory  
tones are also turned off.  
Ending an internal call, accepting an  
external call  
If you accept an incoming call, the room  
monitor mode is suspended for the dura-  
tion of the call, but the function remains  
activated.  
§Accept§  
Press the display key.  
The internal call is ended. You are con-  
nected to the external caller.  
If you switch off the handset, the room  
monitor mode is deactivated. You must  
reactivate the function when you switch  
the handset back on.  
Rejecting the external call  
Precondition: the external call is waiting  
on the fixed network connection.  
§Reject§  
Press the display key.  
The call waiting tone is turned off. You  
remain connected with the internal sub-  
scriber. The ringer tone can still be heard  
on other registered handsets.  
Please note:  
You can not reject calls on the VoIP connection.  
59  
             
Using several handsets  
Caution!  
Changing previously set external  
destination number  
You should always check the operation  
of the room monitor before use. For  
example, test its sensitivity. Check the  
connection if you are diverting the room  
monitor to an outside number.  
v ¢í Add. Features ¢Room Monitor  
s
§Edit§  
X
Scroll to the Call to: line.  
Press the display key.  
When the function is switched on the hand-  
set's operating time is severely reduced. If  
necessary, place the handset on the base  
station. This ensures that the batteries do  
not run down.  
¤ Enter number as described in "Activat-  
ing the room monitor and entering the  
¤ nSauvmebcehratnogbees (cpaallgeed"1(0p1a)g.e 60).  
Changing previously set internal  
destination number  
Ideally the handset should be positioned 1  
to 2 metres away from the baby. The micro-  
phone must be directed towards the baby.  
The connection to which the room monitor  
is diverted must not be blocked by an acti-  
vated answer machine.  
v ¢í Add. Features ¢Room Monitor  
Activating the room monitor and  
s
§Edit§  
§Yes§  
Scroll to the Call to: line.  
evnte¢ringíthAedndu. Fmebateurretso¢beRcoaolmleMdonitor  
Press the display key.  
Press the display key to con-  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
¤ Enter number as described in "Activat-  
Room M.:  
ing the room monitor and entering the  
Select On to activate.  
¤ nSauvmebcehratnogbees (cpaallgeed"1(0p1a)g.e 60).  
Call to:  
Press the display key §Edit§ and enter des-  
tination number.  
External number: Select number from  
the directory or enter directly. Only the  
last 4 characters are displayed.  
Internal number: Delete any stored  
external number. §INT§ s (select hand-  
set or Call All, if all registered handsets  
are to be called) §OK§.  
Store number with Save.  
Level:  
Set noise level sensitivity (Low or High).  
¤ Save changes (page 101).  
The function is now activated. With v,  
you can move directly to settings.  
Please note:  
An external number will be dialled via the set  
standard connection (VoIP or fixed network).  
If the number is to be dialled via the non-  
standard connection, enter a star (*) at the  
end of the number.  
60  
         
Setting the handset  
Setting the screen picture  
Setting the handset  
You can display a screen picture (picture or  
digital clock) when the handset is in idle  
status. This will replace the idle status dis-  
play. It may conceal the date, time and  
name.  
Your handset is preconfigured, but you  
can change these settings to suit your  
individual requirements.  
Changing the display language  
The screen picture is not displayed in cer-  
tain situations, e.g. during a call or when  
the handset has been de-registered.  
You can view the display texts in different  
lvang¢uagÐesS. ettings ¢Handset  
If a logo has been activated, the menu  
item Screen Picture is marked with ½.  
¢Language  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Display  
The current language is marked with ½.  
¢Screen Picture  
s
Select a language and press  
§OK§.  
The current setting is displayed.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
Activation:  
If you accidentally choose a language you  
do not understand:  
Select On (screen picture is displayed)  
or Off (no screen picture).  
v 5 41  
Selection:  
Press keys in sequence.  
Change screen picture if necessary  
¤ (Ssaeveebcehlaonwg)e.s (page 101).  
s
Select the correct language  
and press §OK§.  
If the screen picture conceals the display,  
press the end call key briefly to show the  
idle display with time and date.  
Setting the display  
You have a choice of four colour schemes  
Cvha¢ngiÐngStehtteinsgscr¢eenDipsipclatuyre  
avnd¢sevÐeraSledttiifnfegrsen¢t cDoinstprlaaysts.  
¢Screen Picture  
Colour Scheme  
Select and press §OK§.  
s
Scroll to the Selection line.  
s
Select a colour scheme and  
§View§  
Press the display key. The  
active screen picture is dis-  
played  
press §OK§ (½ = current colour).  
a
Press briefly.  
s
Select a picture or Clock .  
s
Scroll to the Contrast line.  
Select and press §OK§.  
Select contrast.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
Contrast  
r
¤ Save changes (page 101).  
§Save§  
a
Press the display key.  
Press and hold (idle status).  
61  
                       
Setting the handset  
u SMS Notific. (§Notif.§)  
Setting the display backlight  
Opens the menu for activating SMS  
notification (page 41):  
Depending on whether or not the handset  
is in the base station you can set different  
levels of display backlight. If the base sta-  
tion is switched on, the display is perma-  
nently dimmed.  
î Messaging ¢ SMS ¢ Settings  
¢ Notify Type  
u E-mail (§EMail§)  
Opens the e-mail submenu for receiv-  
ing and reading e-mail notifications  
(page 45):  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Display ¢Backlight  
The current setting is displayed.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
î Messaging ¢ E-mail  
u Messenger (§Messgr.§)  
In Charger  
Select On or Off.  
Opens the Messenger submenu for  
chatting with friends on the Internet  
(page 48):  
without Charger  
Select On or Off.  
î Messaging ¢ Messenger  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
u Fixed Line Call (§FixedLine§)  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
Opens the pre-dialling option for mak-  
ing a call via the fixed network (fixed  
line).  
Please note:  
When the display backlight is switched on, the  
standby time of the handset is reduced to  
approx. 30 hours.  
u IP Call (§IP§)  
Opens the pre-dialling option for mak-  
ing a call via VoIP.  
Assigning the handset's  
display keys  
q
Select a function and press  
§OK§.  
The handset returns to idle status.  
The default settings for the handset's dis-  
play keys are preset with functions in idle  
status. You can change the assignment of  
the display keys, i.e. assign other func-  
tions to the display keys. The change is  
handset-specific.  
The label of the display key has changed  
(e.g. §Messgr.§ when choosing: Messenger ).  
Starting a function  
¤ With the handset in idle status, press  
the display key briefly.  
Assigning a function  
The function menu (page 62) is opened.  
¤ In idle status press and hold the right  
or left display key (e.g. §FixedLine§).  
Activating/deactivating  
auto answer  
The list of possible key assignments is  
opened. The following can be selected:  
u INT (§INT§)  
If you have activated this function, when  
you get a call you can simply lift the hand-  
set out of the base station without having  
to press the talk key c.  
Opens the list of internal subscribers.  
u SMS (§SMS§)  
Opens the SMS submenu for writing,  
sending and reading SMS messages  
(page 37):  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Handset  
Auto Answer  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
î Messaging ¢ SMS  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
62  
             
Setting the handset  
Settings for individual functions  
Adjusting the loudspeaker  
volume  
Set the volume and melody depending on  
the type of signalling required.  
You can set the loudspeaker volume for  
handsfree talking to five different levels  
and the earpiece volume to three different  
levels. You can only make these adjust-  
ments during a call.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Audio Settings  
¢ Ringer Settings  
Ext. Calls / Internal Calls  
Select and press §OK§.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
The handsfree volume can only be  
adjusted when this function is set.  
r
s
r
§Save§  
Set volume (1–6).  
Scroll to the next line.  
Select melody.  
You are conducting an external call.  
t
r
§Save§  
Open menu.  
Press the display key to save  
the setting.  
Select volume.  
Press display key if necessary  
to save the setting perma-  
nently.  
In idle status, you can also open the menu  
Ringer Settings by pressing t briefly.  
If t is assigned with another function:  
Same ringer tone for all functions  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Audio Settings  
Volume  
Select and press §OK§.  
Configure setting (see above).  
¤ Set volume and ringer tone (see  
"Settings for individual functions").  
Changing ringer tones  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
u Volume:  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
You can choose between five volumes  
(1–5; e.g. volume 2 = ˆ) and  
the "Crescendo" ring (6; volume  
increases with each ring =  
Activating/deactivating the ringer tone  
You can deactivate the ringer tone on your  
handset before you answer a call or when  
the handset is in idle status; the ringer  
tone can be deactivated permanently or  
just for the current call. The ringer tone  
cannot be re-activated while an external  
call is in progress.  
).  
u Ringer tones:  
You can choose between 15 different  
melodies.  
You can set different ringer tones for the  
following functions:  
u Ext. Calls: for external calls  
u Internal Calls: for internal calls  
Deactivating the ringer tone permanently  
*
Press and hold the star key  
until the Ú icon appears in the  
display.  
u All: the same ringer tone for all func-  
tions  
Re-activating the ringer tone  
Press and hold the star key.  
*
63  
                     
Setting the handset  
Battery:  
Select On, Off or In Call. The battery  
Deactivating the ringer tone for the current  
call  
warning tone is only activated/deacti-  
§Silence§  
Press the display key.  
¤ vSaatveedcahnadngoensly(psaoguend1s01du).ring a call.  
Activating/deactivating the alert tone  
You cannot deactivate the confirmation  
tone for placing the handset in the base  
station.  
In place of the ringer tone you can activate  
an alert tone. When you receive a call, you  
will hear a short tone ("Beep") instead of  
the ringer tone.  
Setting the alarm clock  
*
Press and hold the star key  
and within 3 seconds:  
Precondition: The date and time have  
already been set (page 9).  
§Beep§§  
Press the display key. A call will  
now be signalled by one short  
alert tone. You will now see  
Activating/deactivating the alarm  
clock and setting the wake-up time  
º
in the display.  
v ¢ì Alarm Clock  
Activating/deactivating advisory  
tones  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Activation:  
Select On or Off.  
Your handset uses "advisory tones" to tell  
you about different activities and statuses.  
The following advisory tones can be acti-  
vated and deactivated independently of  
each other:  
Time:  
Enter the wake-up time in 4-digit for-  
mat.  
Melody:  
Select melody.  
u Key click: every key press is confirmed.  
u Advisory tones:  
Volume:  
¤ SSaevtethcehavonlguems e(p(a1g-6e)1. 01).  
Confirmation tone (ascending tone  
sequence): at the end of an entry/  
setting and when an SMS or a new  
entry arrives in the calls list  
You will see the ¼ icon.  
A wake-up call with the selected ringer  
melody is signalled on the handset.  
The wake up call sounds for 60 seconds.  
The display shows Alarm Clock . If no key is  
pressed, the wake-up call is repeated  
twice at five minute intervals and then  
switched off.  
Error tone (descending tone  
sequence): when you make an  
incorrect entry  
Menu end tone: when scrolling at  
the end of a menu  
u Battery tone: The batteries need to be  
charged.  
During a call, the wake-up call is signalled  
by a short tone.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Audio Settings  
¢ Advisory Tones  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Key Tones:  
Select On or Off.  
Confirm.:  
Select On or Off.  
64  
                       
Base station settings  
Deactivating the wake-up call/  
repeating after a pause (snooze mode)  
Base station settings  
The base station settings are carried out  
using a registered Gigaset S45 handset.  
Precondition: A wake-up call is sounding.  
§OFF§  
Press the display key. The  
wake-up call is deactivated.  
Protecting against unauthorised  
access  
or  
§Snooze§  
Press the display key or any  
key. The wake-up call is deacti-  
vated and then repeated after  
5 minutes. After the second  
repetition the wake-up call is  
deactivated completely.  
Protect the system settings of the base sta-  
tion with a PIN known only to yourself.  
The system PIN is one of the items you  
must enter when registering and deregis-  
tering a handset, changing the VoIP set-  
tings or restoring to factory settings.  
Restoring the handset default  
settings  
Changing the system PIN  
You will have to enter the system PIN e.g.  
when you register a handset with the base  
station, change the VoIP settings or start  
the Web configurator.  
Each individual handset setting is reset, in  
particular the language, display, volume,  
ringer and alarm clock settings (see from  
page 61). The last number redial list is  
cleared.  
You can change the base station's 4-digit  
default system PIN ("0000") to a 4-digit  
system PIN known only to yourself.  
v ¢Ð ¢Handset ¢Reset Handset  
§Yes§  
Press the display key.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base ¢System PIN  
You can cancel the restoring  
process by pressing a or the  
display key §No§.  
~
Enter current system PIN and  
press §OK§.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
~
s
~
Enter new system PIN.  
Scroll to the Re-enter PIN: line.  
Now re-enter the new system  
PIN and press §OK§.  
For security reasons, "  
instead of the system PIN.  
" is displayed  
****  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
65  
                     
Base station settings  
¤ Remove the base station mains unit  
¤ fPrroemsstahnedsohcokledtt(hpeargeeg1is1tr)a. tion/paging  
¤ kPeluyg(tphaegme 1ai)n. s unit back into the power  
¤ sPorecskseta.nd hold the registration/paging  
Restoring the base station to  
factory settings  
Resetting the base station via the  
menu  
Each individual setting is reset, in particu-  
lar:  
¤ kReeyle(aastelethasetr2egsiesctr.)a.tion/paging key.  
u VoIP settings such as VoIP provider and  
account data and DTMF settings  
(page 68, page 77, page 86)  
The base station has now been reset.  
Activating/deactivating music  
on hold  
u Settings for the local network (page 69,  
page 75)  
u Default connection (page 67)  
u The names of the handsets (page 58)  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base  
Music on hold  
u SMS settings (e.g. SMS centres,  
Select and press §OK§ to activate  
or deactivate music on hold  
(½ = on).  
u Settings for the connection to the PABX  
(page 71)  
SMS lists and calls list are deleted.  
Activating/deactivating  
repeater mode  
The date and time and the system PIN are  
retained. The handsets are still registered.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base ¢Base Reset  
With a repeater you can increase the range  
and reception strength of your base sta-  
tion. You will need to activate repeater  
mode. This will terminate any calls being  
made via the base station at that time.  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to  
confirm.  
Precondition: a repeater is registered  
with the base station.  
Resetting the base station using a key  
on the base station  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base  
¢Add. Features  
As with resetting the base station via the  
menu, all individual settings are reset. The  
system PIN will also be reset to "0000" and  
all handsets registered above and  
beyond the delivery scope are deregis-  
tered.  
Repeater Mode  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the security prompt.  
Please note:  
For how to reregister the handsets after reset-  
ting, if necessary, see page 56.  
¤ Remove the cable connections from  
the base station to the router (page 11)  
and fixed network (page 11).  
66  
               
Base station settings  
Starting the firmware update manually  
Setting the default connection  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base  
You can make settings according to  
whether you want to make calls via VoIP or  
fixed network by default.  
Software Update  
Select and press §OK§.  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Telephony  
¢Default Line  
The base station establishes a connection  
to the Internet or to the local PC.  
VoIP / Fixed Line  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
When making calls:  
¤ Press the talk key c briefly if you  
want to make the call via the default  
connection.  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to start  
the firmware update.  
Please note:  
The firmware update can last up to 3 min-  
utes.  
When updating from the Internet, checks  
are made to ensure that no newer version  
of the firmware exists. If this is not the case,  
the operation is terminated and a message  
is issued to that effect.  
If an error arises during a firmware update  
from a local PC, the most recent version of  
the firmware is automatically downloaded  
from the Internet. Your phone should  
therefore be connected to the Internet dur-  
ing every firmware update.  
¤ Press and hold the talk key c if you  
want to make the call via the other con-  
nection type.  
Updating the base station  
firmware  
If necessary, you can update your base sta-  
tion firmware.  
The firmware update is downloaded  
directly from the Internet by default. The  
relevant website is preconfigured in your  
phone.  
Automatic firmware update  
Your phone will check daily whether a  
newer firmware update is available via the  
Internet on the Siemens configuration  
server. If this is the case, the message  
New firmware available will be displayed  
when the handset is in idle status, and the  
message key f flashes.  
As an alternative to uploading the  
firmware via the Internet, it can also be  
loaded from a local PC. You can specify the  
PC via the Web configurator (page 92).  
This setting applies only to the following  
firmware update.  
f
Press the message key.  
Precondition:  
The base station is in idle status, i.e.:  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
u No calls are being made via the fixed  
The firmware will be loaded onto your  
phone.  
network or VoIP.  
u There is no internal connection  
between the registered handsets.  
Please note:  
If you reply to the request with §No§, the dis-  
play will not be repeated. The message  
New firmware available will only be shown  
again if a newer version of the firmware  
than the one rejected is available.  
u No other handset has opened the base  
station menu.  
You can specify the automatic version  
check via the Web configurator (page 93).  
67  
           
Making VoIP settings  
Changing settings without the  
connection assistant  
Making VoIP settings  
In order to be able to use VoIP, you must  
set a few parameters for your phone.  
You can change your provider's VoIP set-  
tings and the VoIP user data via the menu  
without starting the connection assistant.  
You can make the following settings using  
your handset.  
u Download the general access data for  
your VoIP provider from the Siemens  
configuration server and store them on  
your phone.  
Downloading your VoIP provider's  
settings  
The general settings for various VoIP pro-  
viders are available for download on the  
Internet. The relevant website is precon-  
figured in your phone.  
u Enter your personal access data for  
your first VoIP account (first VoIP phone  
number). You can configure the access  
data for five further VoIP account via  
the phone's Web configurator.  
Precondition: your phone is connected to  
the Internet.  
u Setting the phone's IP address in the  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Telephony ¢VoIP  
LAN.  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
Please note:  
You can set these and other parameters  
conveniently via the Web configurator on a  
PC connected to your local network (see  
page 72).  
Select Provider  
Select and press §OK§.  
The phone establishes a connection to the  
Internet.  
The connection assistant on your phone  
can help you make the settings.  
q
q
Select country and press §OK§.  
Select VoIP provider and press  
§OK§.  
Using the connection assistant  
Your VoIP provider data is downloaded  
and saved in your phone.  
The connection assistant starts automati-  
cally when you set the handset and base  
station up for the first time, or when you  
try to connect to the Internet before mak-  
ing the necessary settings.  
Please note:  
If an error occurs during the download, an  
error message will be displayed. You can  
find possible messages and measures in the  
table on page 94.  
You can also start the connection assistant  
You can make and adapt the general set-  
tings for your VoIP provider manually via  
your phone's Web configurator, see  
page 78.  
vvia t¢he mÐeSneut:tings ¢Telephony  
Connection Assist.  
Select and press §OK§.  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
For how to enter VoIP settings using the  
connection assistant, see page 12.  
68  
             
Making VoIP settings  
Authent. Name: / Authent. Password:  
Automatic update for the VoIP provider  
settings  
Enter the provider-dependent access  
data that has to be transferred by the  
phone to the SIP service at registration.  
After the first download of the VoIP pro-  
vider settings, your phone will check daily  
whether a newer version of the file for  
your VoIP provider is available via Internet  
on the Siemens configuration server. If  
this is the case, when the handset is in idle  
status the message New profile available  
will be displayed, and the message key  
f flashes.  
¤ Click §Save§ to save the settings.  
Setting the phone's IP address  
in LAN  
The base station requires an IP address in  
order to be "recognised" by the LAN.  
f
Press the message key.  
The IP address can be assigned to the base  
station (by the router) automatically or  
manually.  
§Yes§  
Press the display key to con-  
firm the prompt.  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
u If performed dynamically, the router's  
DHCP server automatically assigns the  
base station an IP address. The base  
station's IP address can be changed  
according to router settings.  
The new data for your VoIP provider will be  
downloaded and saved on the phone.  
Please note:  
u If performed manually/statically, you  
assign the base station a static IP  
address. This may be necessary  
depending on your network configura-  
tion.  
If you reply to the request with §No§, the dis-  
play will not be repeated. The message  
New profile available will only be shown  
again if a newer version of the VoIP settings  
than the one rejected is available.  
You can specify the automatic version  
check via the Web configurator (page 93).  
Please note:  
For how to make the local network settings  
on the Web configurator, turn to page 75.  
To assign the IP address dynamically, the  
DHCP server on the router must be acti-  
vated. Please also read the user guide for  
your router.  
Entering/changing VoIP user data  
The VoIP settings must also be extended  
for your personal data. You will receive all  
necessary data from your VoIP provider.  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Base  
Please note when making these entries that  
the VoIP user data is case sensitive. To enter  
text see page 102.  
¢Local Network  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Telephony  
¢VoIP (enter system PIN)  
¢Provider Registr.  
IP Address Type:  
Select Static or Dynamic. Select  
If you select Static, you must manually  
define the IP address and the subnet  
mask for the base station in the next  
lines, as well as the standard gateway  
and DNS server.  
¤ Change multiple line input:  
Username:  
Enter the user name (caller ID) for your  
VoIP provider account. The Username is  
usually identical to your Internet phone  
number (the first part of your SIP  
address see page 79).  
69  
               
Making VoIP settings  
IP Address:  
¤ Click §Save§ to save the settings.  
For IP Address Type = Dynamic:  
The IP address that is currently assigned  
to the base station will be displayed. It  
cannot be amended.  
You can find notes on the IP address and the  
subnet mask on page 76 and in the glossary on  
page 115/page 118.  
For IP Address Type = Static:  
Enter the IP address that is to be  
assigned to the base station (overwrit-  
ing the current settings).  
Activating/deactivating display  
of VoIP status messages  
192.168.2.2 has been preset.  
If the function is activated, a VoIP status  
code for your service provider is displayed.  
For the IP address see also page 115.  
Subnet Mask:  
Activate the function e.g. if you have prob-  
lems with VoIP connections. You will  
receive a provider-specific status code,  
which supports the service when the  
problem is analysed. You will find a table  
with the possible status screens in the  
appendix (page 97).  
For IP Address Type = Dynamic:  
The subnet mask that is currently  
assigned to the base station will be dis-  
played. It cannot be amended.  
For IP Address Type = Static:  
Enter the IP address that is to be  
assigned to the base station (overwrit-  
ing the current settings).  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Telephony ¢VoIP  
~
Enter the system PIN and press  
§OK§.  
The default setting is 255.255.255.0  
For the subnet mask see also page 118.  
Show Stat. on HS  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
DNS Server:  
For IP Address Type = Static:  
Please note:  
Enter the IP address for the preferred  
DNS server. The DNS server (Domain  
Name System) converts the symbolic  
name of a server (DNS name) into the  
public IP address for the server when  
the connection is made.  
For how to make the setting on the Web con-  
figurator, see page 93.  
Check the base station  
MAC address  
You can specify your router's IP address  
here. The router forwards phone  
address requests to its DNS server.  
Depending on your network configura-  
tion, you may have to enter your base sta-  
tion MAC address, for example, into your  
router's access control list. You can check  
your base station MAC address:  
192.168.2.1 has been preset.  
Default Gateway:  
For IP Address Type = Static:  
Enter the IP address for the standard  
gateway, by means of which the local  
network is connected with the Internet.  
This is generally the local (private)  
IP address for your router (e.g.  
192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this  
information to be able to access the  
Internet.  
v 5 5 O 2 Q  
The base station MAC address is displayed.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
192.168.2.1 has been preset.  
70  
                 
Operating the base station on the PABX  
Setting pauses  
Operating the base station  
on the PABX  
Changing pause after line seizure  
The following settings are only necessary  
when your PABX requires them; see the  
PABX user guide. The settings only con-  
cern fixed network connections.  
You can set the length of the pause  
inserted between pressing the talk key  
c and sending the phone number.  
v 5 5 O 1 L  
You cannot send or receive SMS messages  
on PABXs that do not support Calling Line  
Identification.  
~
Enter a number for the length  
of the pause (1 = 1 sec.;  
2 = 3 secs.; 3 = 7 secs.) and  
press §OK§.  
Changing the dialling mode  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
Yvou ¢canÐseStetthtiengdsia¢llingTemlepohdoen.y  
Changing the pause after the recall key  
You can change the length of the pause if  
your PABX requires this (refer to the user  
guide for your PABX).  
¢Fixed Line ¢Dialling Mode  
Tone / Pulse  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
v 5 5 O 1 1  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
~
Enter a number for the length  
of the pause (1 = 1 sec.;  
2 = 2 secs.; 3 = 3 secs.;  
Setting the flashing time  
4 = 6 secs.) and press §OK§.  
Yvou ¢canÐseStetthtiengflsas¢hinTgelteipmheo.ny  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
¢Fixed Line ¢Recall  
Switching temporarily to  
tone dialling (DTMF)  
q
Select flashing time and press  
§OK§.  
The current language is indicated by ½.  
Press and hold (idle status).  
If your PABX still operates with dial pulsing  
(DP), but you need touch tone dialling  
(DTMF) for a connection (e.g. to listen to  
the network mailbox) you must switch to  
touch tone dialling for the call.  
a
Precondition: You are currently conduct-  
ing an external call via the fixed network  
or you have dialled an external fixed net-  
work number or an external call is sig-  
nalled.  
§Options§  
Open menu.  
Tone Dialing  
Select and press §OK§.  
Touch tone dialling is now activated for  
this call only.  
71  
                   
Web configurator  
u Obtain information about your phone's  
status (firmware version, MAC address  
etc.).  
Web configurator  
The Web configurator is the Web interface  
for your handset. It allows you to make the  
settings for your phone's base station via  
your PC's Web browser.  
Connecting PC with  
Web configurator  
Please note:  
Depending on your VoIP provider, it is possible  
that you will be unable to change individual  
settings in the Web configurator.  
¤ Launch the Web browser on your PC.  
Precondition: The settings of an avail-  
able firewall on the PC allow the PC and  
telephone to communicate with each  
¤ Eonthteerr.the phone's IP address into the  
address field of the Web browser,  
e.g. http://192.168.2.2.  
Configuring the phone via  
your PC  
Your phone's IP address can change if  
you have activated dynamic IP address  
assignment (page 75).  
Preconditions:  
u A standard Web browser is installed on  
the PC, e.g. Internet Explorer version  
6.0 or higher, or Firefox version 1.0.4 or  
higher.  
You can check the phone's current IP  
¤ aPrdedsrsetshseonretthuernhkaenyd.set (page 70).  
u The phone and PC are connected with  
each other via a router.  
A connection is established to the phone's  
Web configurator.  
Please note:  
The phone is not blocked while you make  
your settings in the Web configurator. You  
can also use your phone to make calls or  
change base station or handset settings on  
your handset at the same time.  
Registering, setting the  
Web configurator language  
Once you have successfully established  
the connection, the Web page Login will  
be displayed in the Web browser.  
While you are connected to the Web config-  
urator, it is blocked to other users. It cannot  
be accessed by more than one user at any  
time.  
You can select the language you want the  
menus and Web configurator dialogs to be  
displayed in. The language that is cur-  
rently selected is displayed in the top field  
of the Web page.  
With the Web configurator on your phone  
you have the following options:  
u Configure your phone access to the  
local network (IP address, gateway to  
the Internet).  
¤ If necessary, click on  
to open the list  
¤ oSeflaevcatitlahbelelalnagnugaugaeg.es.  
u Configure your phone for VoIP.  
u Define the data server for firmware  
updates and load new firmware onto  
the phone if necessary.  
¤ In the bottom field of the Web page,  
enter your phone's system PIN (default  
setting: 0000) to access the Web con-  
u Copy contacts from the Outlook  
address book on your PC into the hand-  
set directories or back up your hand-  
set's directories on your PC.  
¤ fCilgicukraotnorOfKu.nctions.  
72  
                     
Web configurator  
Once you have successfully registered, a  
Home opens with general information on  
the Web configurator.  
Logging off  
In the menu bar (page 74) at the top right  
of every Web page in the Web configura-  
tor, you will see the command Log Off.  
Click on Log Off to log off from the Web  
configurator.  
Please note:  
If you have forgotten your system PIN, you  
must restore your device's factory settings.  
Please note that this will restore all other  
settings too (page 66).  
Warning:  
If you do not make any entries for a lengthy  
period (around 10 minutes), you will be  
automatically logged off. The next time  
you try to make an entry or open a Web  
page, the Login Web page will be displayed.  
Enter the system PIN again to log in again.  
Entries that had not yet been saved on the  
phone before automatic log-off are lost.  
Always use the command Log Off to end the  
connection to the Web configurator. If, for  
example, you close the Web browser without  
logging off beforehand, it is possible that  
access to the Web configurator will be blocked  
for a few minutes.  
Structure of the Web pages  
The Web pages contain the UI elements  
displayed in see Figure 2.  
Menu bar  
Navigation area  
Working area  
Buttons  
Figure 2 Example of the structure of a Web page  
73  
           
Web configurator  
Menu bar  
Working area  
In the menu bar, the Web configurator  
menus are depicted in the form of tab  
pages.  
Depending on the function selected, infor-  
mation or dialog boxes are displayed in  
the working area, which allow you to  
make or change your phone settings.  
The following menus are available:  
Making changes  
u Home  
The start screen is opened once you  
have registered with the Web configu-  
rator. It contains information on the  
Web configurator functions.  
Make settings for entry fields, lists or  
options.  
u There may be restrictions regarding the  
possible values for a field, e.g. entering  
special characters or certain value  
ranges.  
u Settings (page 75)  
This menu allows you to make settings  
on your phone.  
u To open a list, click on  
. You can  
choose between default values.  
u Status (page 93)  
u There are two kinds of options:  
This menu gives you information about  
your phone.  
– Options in a list, from which you can  
activate one or several options.  
Active, i.e. selected, options are  
If you click on the Settings menu, a list with  
this menu's functions is displayed in the  
navigation area (see below).  
highlighted with  
options with  
, non-active  
. You can activate an  
You will find the Log Off function to the  
right of the menu bar on every Web page  
(page 73).  
option by clicking on  
. The status  
of the other options on the list does  
not change. You can deactivate an  
option by clicking on  
.
Please note:  
You will find an overview of the Web configu-  
rator menu on page 19.  
– Alternative options The active  
option on the list is highlighted with  
, and the non-active with  
You can activate an option by click-  
ing on . The previously activated  
option is deactivated. You can only  
deactivate an option by activating  
another option.  
.
Navigation area  
In the navigation area, the functions of the  
menu selected in the menu bar (page 74)  
are listed.  
If you click on a function, the associated  
page opens in the working area with infor-  
mation and/or fields for your inputs.  
Applying changes  
As soon as you have made your change on  
a page, activate the new setting on the  
phone by clicking on Set.  
If a function is assigned subfunctions,  
these are displayed with the function as  
soon as you click on the function. The rel-  
evant page for the first subfunction is dis-  
played in the working area.  
If your input in a field does not comply  
with the rules for this field, an appropriate  
error message will be displayed. You can  
then repeat the input.  
74  
       
Web configurator  
Setting the phone with  
Web configurator  
Warning:  
Changes that have not been saved on your  
phone are lost if you move to another Web  
page or if the connection to the Web configu-  
rator is terminated, e.g. due to exceeding the  
time limit (page 73).  
You can make the following settings using  
the Web configurator:  
u Connecting your phone to the local  
Buttons  
network (page 75)  
Buttons are displayed in the bottom sec-  
tion of the working area.  
– Make VoIP provider settings  
(page 78)  
Set  
Save entries on the phone  
– Configure VoIP accounts  
Cancel  
– Specify name of the fixed network  
Reject changes made on the Web page  
and reload the settings that are cur-  
rently saved on your phone to the Web  
page.  
– Activate/deactivate the Gigaset.net  
connection  
– Make settings to improve voice qual-  
ity for the VoIP connections  
– Assign VoIP phone numbers to indi-  
vidual handsets and the answer  
machine  
Opening Web pages  
A brief outline of the navigation to the  
individual Web configurator functions is  
given below.  
u User-specific dialling rules (page 87)  
u Type of DTMF signalling (for remote  
operation of a network mailbox)  
Example:  
u Data server for firmware update down-  
loads (page 92)  
Setting DTMF signalling  
Settings ¢Telephony ¢Advanced Settings  
u Displaying VoIP status messages on  
your handset (page 93)  
To open this Web page, carry out the fol-  
lowing steps after registration:  
IP Configuration  
¤ Click on the Settings menu in the menu  
¤ bCalirc.k on the Telephony function in the  
Assigning the IP address  
navigation area.  
Make the necessary settings for operating  
your phone in your local network and to  
connect it to the Internet. For more  
detailed explanations on the individual  
components/terms, see the glossary  
(page 111).  
The subfunctions of Telephony are dis-  
¤ CpllaicykeodninththeeAndavavnigcaetdioSnetttirneges.  
subfunction.  
The Web page from see Figure 2 will be  
shown in the Web browser.  
¤ Open the following Web page  
Settings ¢ IP Configuration.  
¤ In the Address Assignment area, select  
the IP address type.  
Select Obtained automatically if you want  
your phone to be assigned a dynamic IP  
address by a DHCP server in your local net-  
work. No further settings are necessary for  
the local network.  
75  
                   
Web configurator  
Select Static if you would like to set up a  
static IP address for your phone. A static IP  
address is useful, for example, if port for-  
warding or a DMZ is set up on the router  
for the phone.  
192.168.2.1 has been preset.  
Preferred DNS server  
Enter the IP address for the preferred  
DNS server. DNS (Domain Name Sys-  
tem) allows you to assign public IP  
addresses to symbolic names.  
The DNS server is required to convert  
the DNS name into the IP address when  
connection is being established to a  
server.  
The following fields are displayed when  
you select IP address type = Static:  
IP address  
Enter an IP address for you phone. This  
IP address allows it to be reached by  
other subscribers in your local network  
(e.g. PC).  
You can specify your router's IP address  
here. The router forwards phone  
address requests to its DNS server.  
192.168.2.2 has been preset.  
Please note the following:  
192.168.2.1 has been preset.  
Alternate DNS server (optional)  
– The IP address must be from the  
address block for private use that is  
used in the router. This is generally  
in the range 192.168.0.1 –  
Enter the IP address for the alternative  
DNS server that should be used in situ-  
ations where the preferred DNS server  
cannot be reached.  
192.168.255.254 with Subnet mask  
255.255.255.0. The subnet mask  
determines that the first three parts  
of the IP address must be identical  
for all subscribers in your LAN.  
Click on Set to save the changes.  
Click on Cancel to reject the changes.  
Allow access from other networks  
– The static IP address must not  
belong to the address block (IP pool  
range) that is reserved for the DHCP  
server. It must also not be used by  
another device on the router.  
The default setting for you phone is that  
you can only access your phone's Web  
configurator via a PC that is in the same  
local network as your phone. The subnet  
mask of the PC must match that of the  
phone.  
If necessary, check the settings on the  
router.  
You can also allow access from PCs in  
other networks.  
Subnet mask  
Enter the subnet mask for your device's  
IP address. For addresses from the  
address block 192.168.0.1 –  
192.168.255.254, the subnet mask  
255.255.255.0 is generally used. This  
is preconfigured when the phone is  
supplied.  
Warning:  
Expansion of access entitlement to other net-  
works increases the risk of unauthorised  
access.  
It is therefore recommended to deactivate  
remote access again if you no longer need it.  
¤ Open the following Web page  
¤ In the Remote Management area, activate  
the option Yes to permit access from  
other networks.  
Default gateway  
Settings ¢ IP Configuration.  
Enter the IP address for the standard  
gateway, by means of which the local  
network is connected with the Internet.  
This is generally the local (private) IP  
address for your router (e.g.  
192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this  
information to be able to access the  
Internet.  
To deactivate remote access, click on  
the No option. Access is then limited to  
PCs in your own local network.  
76  
                 
Web configurator  
Access to the Web configurator services  
from other networks is only possible if  
your router is set accordingly. The router  
must pass on the service requests from  
"outside" to Port 80 (standard port) of the  
phone. Please also read the user guide for  
your router.  
To establish a connection, the public IP  
address or the DNS name of the router  
and, where applicable, the port number  
on the router, must be indicated in the  
Web browser of the remote PC.  
Configuring telephone  
connections  
Figure 3 List of possible connections  
The list will show the following:  
You can configure up to seven phone  
numbers on your phone: your fixed net-  
work number and six VoIP phone num-  
bers.  
Name  
Name of the connection. This will show  
the name that you have defined for the  
connection (page 78, page 82) or the  
default name (IP 1 to IP6 for VoIP con-  
nections, Fixed Line for fixed network  
connections).  
You need to set up a VoIP account with a  
VoIP provider for each VoIP phone num-  
ber. You must save the access data for  
each account and for the relevant VoIP  
provider in the phone. You can assign a  
name to each connection (VoIP and fixed  
network).  
Status  
The status of the connection will be  
shown for VoIP connections:  
registered  
To configure the connections:  
The connection is activated. The phone  
has been successfully registered. You  
can use the connection to make calls.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.  
A list (see Figure 3) will be shown with all  
possible connections that you can config-  
ure, or have already configured, for your  
phone.  
Disabled  
The connection is deactivated. The  
phone is not registering with the corre-  
sponding account with the VoIP serv-  
ice. You can not use the connection to  
make or receive calls.  
Registration failed / Server not accessible  
(Examples)  
The phone could not be registered with  
the VoIP service, e.g. because the VoIP  
access data is incomplete or incorrect,  
to the Internet. There is information  
about this in the section entitled "Ques-  
tions and answers" from page 94.  
77  
         
Web configurator  
Active  
You must enter the VoIP provider's general  
access data in these areas. You can down-  
load the general access data for many VoIP  
providers from the Internet (page 82).  
You can use the option in the Active col-  
umn to activate (½) and deactivate (Õ)  
VoIP connections. If a connection is  
deactivated, the phone will not register  
for this connection. The connection can  
be activated/deactivated by clicking  
directly on the option. The change does  
not need to be saved.  
¤ Make the settings on the Web page.  
¤ Save them in the phone, see page 81.  
¤ Active the connection if necessary, see  
page 81.  
To configure a connection or to change  
the configuration of a connection:  
Area: IP Connection  
Connection Name or Number  
¤ Click on the Edit button behind the con-  
Enter a name for the VoIP connection or  
the VoIP phone number (max. 16 char-  
acters). The connection will be shown  
under this name on the handset and in  
the Web configurator interface, e.g.  
when assigning sending and receiving  
numbers (page 85), with call display  
(page 21).  
nection.  
This will open a Web page where you can  
u in the section "Configuring the VoIP  
u in the section "Configuring the fixed  
network connection" on page 82  
Provider  
The name of your VoIP provider will be  
shown if you have already selected it.  
Configuring the VoIP connection  
Open the Web page:  
Click on the Select VoIP Provider button  
to select your provider, and to start  
required. To find out how to do this,  
please read "Selecting the VoIP provider  
and downloading the VoIP provider  
data" on page 82.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.  
¤ Click on the Edit button behind the VoIP  
connection that you want to configure  
or whose configuration you want to  
change.  
This will open a Web page where you can  
make the settings that your phone needs  
to access your provider's VoIP server.  
Please note:  
If you click on the Select VoIP Provider but-  
ton, any changes that have been made to  
the Web page will be saved and checked.  
Values may need to be corrected before the  
The downloaded VoIP provider data will be  
entered in the areas General Provider Data  
(page 79) and Network (page 80), so that,  
generally speaking, no further settings  
need to be made.  
The Web page always displays the follow-  
ing areas:  
u IP Connection (page 78),  
u Personal Provider Data and (page 79)  
u Call Forwarding (page 79).  
The areas  
u General Provider Data (page 79) and  
u Network (page 80)  
can be shown and hidden by clicking on  
the buttons Show Advanced Settings and  
Hide Advanced Settings.  
If the general data for your VoIP provider is  
not available for download, you will need to  
make these settings yourself as described  
below.  
78  
             
Web configurator  
The Call Forwarding area is where you  
Area: Personal Provider Data  
define whether and when calls for this  
VoIP number should be forwarded to  
another number.  
Enter the configuration data that is neces-  
sary for accessing your VoIP provider's SIP  
service. This data can be obtained from  
your VoIP provider.  
You can also use the handset to set the  
diversion and activate/deactivate it, see  
page 28.  
Authentication Name  
Specify the registration or authentica-  
tion ID agreed with your VoIP provider.  
The registration ID serves as the access  
ID that your phone must specify when  
registering with the SIP proxy/registrar  
server. The Authentication Name is  
mainly identical to the Username, i.e. to  
your Internet phone number.  
Status  
Activate the On / Off option to activate  
or deactivate the call forwarding.  
When  
You choose when an incoming call  
should be forward: When busy / No reply  
/ Always.  
Authentication password  
Call number  
Enter the password that you have  
agreed with your VoIP provider in the  
Authentication password field. The phone  
needs the password when registering  
with the SIP proxy/registrar server.  
Enter the phone number to which the  
calls should be forwarded. Note that  
you may have to enter the area code  
when diverting to a fixed network  
number in the same area (depending  
on your VoIP provider and the setting  
for the automatic area code, see  
page 87).  
Username  
Enter the caller ID for your VoIP pro-  
vider account. This ID is usually identi-  
cal to the first part of your SIP address  
(URI, your Internet phone number).  
The settings only affect the selected VoIP  
phone number.  
Example: If your SIP address is  
"[email protected]", enter  
"987654321" in Username.  
Area: General Provider Data  
If you have downloaded the general set-  
tings for the VoIP provider from the Sie-  
mens configuration server (page 82),  
then the fields in this area will be preset  
with the data from this download. Gener-  
ally speaking you will not need to make  
any settings in this area.  
Display name (optional)  
Enter any name that should be shown  
in the other party's display when you  
call him via the Internet (example:  
Anna Sand). All characters in the UTF8  
character set (Unicode) are permitted.  
This name must not exceed 32 charac-  
ters  
Domain  
Specify the last part of your SIP address  
(URI) here.  
If you do not enter a name, your  
Username VoIP phone number will be  
displayed.  
Example: For the SIP address  
"[email protected]", enter  
"provider.com" in Domain.  
Ask your VoIP provider if this feature is  
supported.  
Proxy server address  
The SIP proxy is your VoIP provider's  
gateway server. Enter the IP address or  
the (fully-qualified) DNS name of your  
SIP proxy server. Example:  
myprovider.com.  
Area: Call Forwarding  
You can also forward calls for this VoIP  
number to another external number (VoIP,  
fixed network or mobile phone). The for-  
warding is done via VoIP.  
79  
                     
Web configurator  
Proxy server port  
If your phone is connected to a router with  
NAT (Network Address Translation) and/or  
a firewall, you must make some settings in  
this area so that your phone can be  
reached from the Internet (i.e. can be  
addressed).  
Enter the number of the communica-  
tion port that the SIP proxy uses to send  
and receive signalling data (SIP port).  
Port 5060 is used by most VoIP provid-  
ers.  
Through NAT, the IP addresses of subscrib-  
ers in the LAN are concealed behind the  
public IP address of the router.  
Registrar server  
Enter the (fully-qualified) DNS name or  
the IP address of the registrar server.  
The registrar is needed when the  
phone is registered. It assigns the pub-  
lic IP address/port number to your SIP  
address (Username@Domain) that were  
used by the phone at registration. With  
most VoIP providers, the registrar  
server is identical to the SIP server.  
Example: reg.myprovider.com.  
For incoming calls  
If port forwarding is activated or a DMZ is  
set up for the phone on the router, no spe-  
cial settings are required for incoming  
calls.  
If this is not the case, an entry in the NAT  
routing table (in the router) is necessary in  
order for the phone to be reached. This  
entry is created when the phone is regis-  
tered with the SIP service. In the interest  
of security, this entry is automatically  
out). The phone must therefore confirm  
its registration at certain intervals (see  
NAT refresh time, page 81), so that the  
entry stays in the routing table.  
Registrar server port  
Enter the communication port used in  
the registrar. It is mainly port 5060 that  
is used.  
Registration refresh time  
Enter the time intervals at which the  
phone should repeat the registration  
with the VoIP server (SIP proxy) (a  
request will be sent to establish a ses-  
sion). The repeat is required so that the  
entry of the phone in the tables of the  
SIP proxy is retained and the phone can  
therefore be reached. The repeat will  
be carried out for all activated VoIP  
phone numbers.  
For outgoing calls  
The phone needs its public address in  
order to receive caller voice data.  
There are two possibilities:  
u The phone requests the public address  
from a STUN server on the Internet  
(Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT).  
STUN can only be used with asymmet-  
ric NATs and non-blocking firewalls.  
The default is 180 seconds.  
If you enter 0 seconds, the registration  
will not be repeated periodically.  
u The phone does not direct the connec-  
tion request to the SIP proxy but to an  
outbound proxy on the Internet that  
supplies the data packets along with  
the public address.  
Area: Network  
Please note:  
If you have downloaded the general settings  
for your VoIP provider from the Siemens con-  
figuration server (page 82), then some fields  
in this area will be preset with the data from  
this download (e.g. the settings for the STUN  
server and the outbound proxy).  
The STUN server and outbound proxy are  
used alternately to work around the NAT/  
firewall in the router.  
STUN enabled  
Click on Yes if you want your phone to  
use STUN as soon as it is used on a  
router with asymmetric NAT.  
80  
           
Web configurator  
STUN server  
Enter the (fully-qualified) DNS name or  
If you have set STUN enabled = No or  
have not entered a STUN server, the  
outbound proxy is always used.  
the IP address of the STUN server on  
the Internet.  
Never  
If you selected the option Yes in the  
STUN enabled field, you must enter a  
STUN server here.  
The outbound proxy is not used.  
If you do not make an entry in the Out-  
bound proxy field, the phone behaves  
independently of the selected mode, as  
with Never.  
STUN port  
Enter the number of the communica-  
tion port on the STUN server. The  
default port is 3478.  
Outbound proxy  
Enter the (fully qualified) DNS name or  
the IP address of your provider's out-  
bound proxy.  
STUN refresh time  
Enter the time intervals at which the  
phone should repeat the registration  
with the STUN server. The repeat is  
required so that the entry of the phone  
in the tables of the STUN server is  
retained. The repeat will be carried out  
for all activated VoIP phone numbers.  
Please note:  
With many providers, the outbound proxy is  
identical to the SIP proxy.  
Outbound proxy port  
Enter the number of the communica-  
tion port used by the outbound proxy.  
Ask your VoIP provider for the  
STUN refresh time.  
The default port is 5060.  
The default is 240 seconds.  
Saving settings on phone  
If you enter 0 seconds, the registration  
will not be repeated periodically.  
¤ Click on Set to save the changes.  
NAT refresh time  
The Connections list will be shown after  
Specify the intervals at which you want  
the phone to update its entry in the  
NAT routing table. Specify an interval in  
seconds that is a little smaller than the  
NAT session timeout.  
saving (see Figure 3 on page 77).  
If you want to reject the changes that have  
been made, click on Cancel. The Web page  
is re-loaded with the data saved on the  
phone.  
As a rule you should not change the  
preconfigured value for the NAT refresh  
time.  
Please note: If you do not make any  
entries for a lengthy period, the connec-  
tion to the Web configurator is automati-  
cally terminated. Unsaved entries are lost.  
If necessary, implement temporary secu-  
rity measures. You can subsequently con-  
tinue the entry and make changes if nec-  
essary.  
Outbound proxy mode  
Specify when the outbound proxy  
should be used.  
Always  
All signalling and voice data sent by the  
phone is sent to the outbound proxy.  
Activating new connection  
If you have configured a new VoIP connec-  
tion, you must also activate it.  
Auto  
Data sent by the phone is only sent to  
the outbound proxy when the phone is  
connected to a router with symmetric  
NAT or blocking firewall. If the phone is  
behind an asymmetric NAT, the STUN  
server is used.  
In the Connections list:  
¤ Activate the relevant option in the  
Active column (½ = activated).  
81  
                     
Web configurator  
Your phone will register itself using the  
relevant access data with the VoIP pro-  
vider. If the registration is successful, after  
a short period the Status column will show  
registered for the connection. You can now  
be reached on this VoIP phone number.  
Configuring the fixed network  
connection  
You can assign a name to your fixed net-  
work connection. The connection will be  
and in the Web configurator interface, e.g.  
when assigning sending and receiving  
numbers (page 85), with call display  
(page 21).  
Please note:  
Once the new entry has been made, the VoIP  
phone number for each handset is assigned as  
a receiving number. For how to adjust the  
assignment, see page 85.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.  
¤ In the Fixed Line Connection area, click  
Selecting the VoIP provider and  
downloading the VoIP provider data  
¤ oEnnttehreyoEudirt fbixuettdonne. twork (fixed line)  
number or the name of your choice  
(max. 16 characters) for your fixed net-  
work connection in the Connection Name  
or Number field. The default is "Fixed  
Line".  
Profile files with the general access data  
for the most important VoIP providers are  
available for download on the Siemens  
server on the Internet. The address for the  
server is stored in your phone (page 92).  
Navigation:  
Activating/deactivating the  
Gigaset.net connection  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.  
¤ Click on the Edit button next to the VoIP  
Your phone is assigned a Gigaset.net  
phone number on delivery. As soon as you  
have connected your phone to the Inter-  
net, you can make calls using the  
Gigaset.net and receive calls from other  
Gigaset.net subscribers, provided that  
your Gigaset.net connection has been  
activated. You can deactivate the  
Gigaset.net connection.  
connection for which you wish to  
¤ dInotwhneloIPaCdotnhneepctrioovnidaererad,actlaic.k on the  
Select VoIP Provider button.  
This will display information on the down-  
load procedure.  
The phone establishes a connection with  
the Siemens server on the Internet. The  
download procedure has several steps:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Connections.  
The list of connections will be displayed  
(see Figure 3 on page 77).  
¤ Click on Next.  
¤ From the list, select the country for  
which the list of VoIP providers is to be  
¤ In the Gigaset.net field use the option in  
the Active column to activate (½) or  
deactivate (Õ) the Gigaset.net connec-  
tion.  
¤ lColaicdkeodn. Next.  
¤ Select a VoIP provider from the list. If  
your provider is not included in the list,  
select Other Provider. You will then have  
to enter all the VoIP data manually  
(page 78).  
¤ Click on Finish.  
The data for the provider selected will be  
loaded onto your phone.  
82  
           
Web configurator  
G729  
Please note:  
Average voice quality. The necessary  
bandwidth is less than 8 kbit/s per voice  
connection.  
If you do not use your Gigaset.net connection  
for six weeks, it is automatically deactivated.  
You cannot be reached for calls from the  
Gigaset.net.  
Both sides of a phone connection (caller/  
sender side and receiver side) must use  
the same voice codec. The voice codec is  
negotiated between the sender and the  
recipient when establishing a connection.  
The connection is reactivated:  
as soon as you start a search in the  
Gigaset.net directory (page 25) or  
make a call via the Gigaset.net (dial a  
number with #9 at the end) or  
activate the connection via the Web config-  
urator as described above.  
You can influence the voice quality by  
selecting (bearing in mind the bandwidth  
of your DSL connection) the voice codecs  
your phone is to use, and specifying the  
order in which the codecs are to be sug-  
gested when a VoIP connection is estab-  
lished.  
Optimising voice quality for  
VoIP connections  
You can make general and connection-  
specific settings to improve the voice qual-  
ity for VoIP telephony.  
Area: Settings for Bandwidth  
The settings in this area influence all VoIP  
connections (VoIP phone numbers).  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Audio.  
Allow 1 VoIP call only  
The voice quality for VoIP connections is  
mainly determined by the voice codec  
used for transferring the data and the  
available bandwidth of your DSL connec-  
tion.  
Generally speaking, you can make  
three VoIP calls simultaneously on your  
phone. If, however, your DSL connec-  
tion has a narrow bandwidth, there  
may be problems if three VoIP calls are  
made at the same time. The data is no  
longer transferred properly (long voice  
delay, data losses etc.).  
In the case of the voice codec, the voice  
data is digitalised (coded / decoded) and  
compressed. A "better" codec (better voice  
quality) means more data needs to be to  
be transferred, i.e. perfect voice data  
transfer requires a DSL connection with a  
larger bandwidth.  
¤ Activate the Yes option next to Allow  
1 VoIP call only to prevent any further  
parallel VoIP phone connections  
¤ bIfeyionug wesitsahbtloishpeedrm. it three VoIP con-  
The following voice codecs are supported  
by your phone:  
nections, activate the No option.  
G711 a law / G711 µ law  
Excellent voice quality (comparable  
with ISDN). The necessary bandwidth is  
64 kbit/s per voice connection.  
Please note: If only one VoIP connection is  
permitted, the following VoIP network services  
are no longer available:  
Call waiting  
G726  
Call waiting is not displayed during a call via  
VoIP.  
Good voice quality (inferior to that with  
G.711 but better than with G.729).  
External consultation call from a VoIP call  
Toggling and initiating a conference call via  
VoIP  
Your phone supports G.726 with a  
transmission rate of 32 kbit/s per voice  
connection.  
83  
           
Web configurator  
Voice Quality  
Voice codecs  
Default settings for the codecs used are  
stored in your phone: one setting opti-  
mised for narrow bandwidths and one  
setting optimised for wide bandwidths.  
Precondition: The Own Codec preference  
option is activated for the Voice Quality  
in the Settings for Bandwidth area.  
Select the voice codecs your phone is to  
use, and specify the order in which the  
codecs are to be suggested when a VoIP  
connection is established via this VoIP  
phone number.  
¤ Activate one of the options Optimized  
for low bandwidth / Optimized for high  
bandwidth if you wish to accept a  
default setting for all VoIP connec-  
tions. The settings are shown in the  
Settings for Connections area and can-  
not be changed.  
¤ Apply the voice codecs that your  
phone is to suggest with outgoing  
calls into the Selected codecs list.  
To do this, in the Available codecs list  
click on the voice codec that you  
want to apply (you can mark several  
entries using the Shift key or the Ctrl  
¤ Mkeoyv).eCtlhicekvoonictehceo<dAedcds bthuatttoyno.u do  
not want the phone to use into the  
Available codecs list.  
¤ Activate the Own Codec preference  
option if you wish to select and set  
connection-specific voice codecs  
yourself (see "Area: Settings for Con-  
nections").  
Area: Settings for Connections  
In this area you can make specific settings  
for each of your VoIP phone numbers.  
Also, select the voice codecs in the  
Available codecs list (see above) and  
You can make the following settings for  
each VoIP phone number configured on  
your phone:  
¤ cSloicrkt tohnetvhoeicReecmoodveec>sbinuttthoen.Selected  
codecs list into the order in which  
they should be suggested to the  
receiving device when a connection  
is established. To do this, use the Up  
and Down buttons.  
When establishing a VoIP connection,  
the phone suggests the 1st voice codec  
in the Selected codecs list to the receiv-  
ing device to begin with. If the receiv-  
ing device does not accept this voice  
codec (e.g. because it is not sup-  
ported), the 2nd voice codec on the list  
is suggested and so on.  
Volume for VoIP Calls  
Depending on the VoIP provider, it is  
possible that the received voice/ear-  
piece volume is too low or too high, so  
that adjusting the volume via the hand-  
set is not adequate.  
Specify whether the received volume  
range is too high or too low. The follow-  
ing options are available:  
Low  
Voice/earpiece volume is too high. Acti-  
vate this option to reduce the volume  
by 6 dB.  
If the receiving device does not accept  
any of the voice codecs in the Selected  
codecs list, the connection is not estab-  
lished. An appropriate message will be  
displayed on the handset.  
Normal  
The voice/earpiece volume does not  
need to be raised/lowered.  
High  
Voice/earpiece volume is too low. Acti-  
vate this option to reduce the volume  
by 6 dB.  
84  
   
Web configurator  
Voice quality and infrastructure  
With your Gigaset S450 IP you have the  
opportunity to make calls with good voice  
quality via VoIP.  
Please note:  
You should only deactivate codecs (put  
them in the Available codecs list) if there is a  
particular reason. The more codecs that are  
deactivated, the greater the danger that  
calls will not be able to be established due  
to unsuccessful codec negotiations.  
With incoming calls, all supported voice  
codecs are always permitted.  
However, your phone's performance with  
VoIP – and therefore the voice quality –  
also depends on the properties of the  
entire infrastructure.  
The following VoIP provider components  
are just some of the things that can influ-  
ence performance:  
Area: Settings for Codecs  
To save additional bandwidth and trans-  
mission capacity, on VoIP connections that  
use codec G729 you can suppress the  
transmission of voice packets in pauses  
("Silence Suppression"). Then, instead of  
the background noises in your environ-  
ment, your caller hears a synthetic noise  
generated in the receiver.  
u Router  
u DSLAM  
u DSL transmission line and speed  
u Connection paths over the Internet  
u If necessary, other applications that  
also use the DSL connection  
Please note: "Silence Suppression" can  
sometimes lead to deterioration in the  
voice quality.  
In VoIP networks, the voice quality is influ-  
enced by various things including the  
"quality of service" (QoS). If the entire  
infrastructure demonstrates QoS, voice  
quality is better (fewer delays, less echo-  
ing, less crackling etc.).  
¤ In the Enable Annex B for codec G729  
field, state whether, when using codec  
G729, transmission of data packets for  
pauses is to be suppressed (activate Yes  
option).  
If, for example, the router does not have  
QoS, then the voice quality is not as good.  
Please see the specialist documentation  
for further information.  
Saving settings on the phone  
¤ Click on the Set button to save the set-  
tings for the voice quality.  
Assigning sending and  
Please note:  
receiving numbers to handsets  
You should observe the following for good  
voice quality:  
Your phone can be assigned up to seven  
phone numbers: the fixed network  
number and up to six VoIP phone num-  
bers.  
When making calls using VoIP, avoid per-  
forming other Internet activities  
(e.g. surfing the net).  
Irrespective of the codec used and the net-  
work capacity utilisation, please note that  
voice delays can occur. Therefore, allow  
your VoIP calling partner to finish speaking.  
Avoid interrupting your calling partner.  
You can assign these numbers to the indi-  
vidual handsets that are connected to your  
base station as receiving and sending  
numbers. The means that for each hand-  
set, you define the calls that it will ring for,  
and which VoIP account (sending  
number) is used by your VoIP provider to  
calculate outgoing VoIP calls.  
85  
       
Web configurator  
Please note:  
Please note:  
A handset is assigned the following numbers  
after it is registered with the base station:  
If a VoIP phone number that has been  
assigned to a handset as a sending number  
is deleted, then the handset will automati-  
cally be assigned the first VoIP phone  
number.  
Receiving numbers: all phone numbers  
assigned to the phone (fixed network and  
VoIP).  
Sending numbers: the fixed network  
number and the VoIP phone number that  
you entered at the start of the phone con-  
figuration.  
If a phone number is not assigned to any  
handset as a receiving number, calls to this  
number will be signalled on all handsets.  
If you have not assigned receiving numbers  
to any of the handsets, calls to all connec-  
tions will be signalled on all handsets.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony  
¢ Number Assignment.  
Setting DTMF signalling for VoIP  
This will display the names of all registered  
handsets, and a list for each handset with  
the phone numbers that are configured  
and activated for the phone. The connec-  
tion names are shown in the Connections  
column. The fixed network connection is  
always at the end of the list.  
DTMF signalling is required, for example,  
for playing and controlling some network  
mailboxes via key codes (digits).  
For VoIP specify how key codes are to be  
converted and sent as DTMF signals: as  
audible information in the voice channel  
or as a "SIP Info" message.  
¤ Define a VoIP phone number as the  
sending number for each handset. To  
do this, click on the option behind the  
phone number in the Send column. The  
previous assignment will automatically  
be deactivated.  
Ask your VoIP provider which type of  
DTMF transmission it supports.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Advanced Set-  
tings.  
Please note:  
In the DTMF over VoIP Connections area,  
make the required settings for sending  
DTMF signals. Bear in mind your provider's  
guidelines.  
The fixed network number is permanently  
assigned to each handset as a sending  
number. This assignment cannot be deacti-  
vated. This guarantees that emergency  
numbers can be dialled from every handset.  
¤ Activate Audio or RFC 2833 if DTMF sig-  
nals are to be transmitted acoustically  
¤ Select the phone numbers for each  
handset (fixed network, VoIP) that are  
to be assigned to the handset as receiv-  
ing numbers. To do this, click on the  
option behind the phone number in  
the Receive column. Every handset can  
be assigned several phone numbers or  
no phone number (½ = assigned).  
¤ (AinctivvoaitceeSpIaPcIknafogeifsD).TMF signals are to  
be transmitted as code.  
¤ Now click on Set to save your settings.  
Please note:  
The settings for DTMF signalling apply to all  
VoIP connections (VoIP accounts).  
¤ Now click on Set to save your settings.  
86  
         
Web configurator  
Defining local communication  
ports for VoIP  
Defining dialling plans  
You can define user-specific dialling plans  
for your phone.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Advanced Set-  
tings.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Dialing Plans.  
In the Listen Ports for VoIP Connections area,  
specify which local ports the telephone is  
to use for VoIP telephony. The ports must  
not be used by any other subscriber in the  
LAN.  
Setting Area Code Predialling  
In VoIP calls you must generally always  
dial the area code – even for local calls.  
You can save the annoying need to dial the  
area code for local calls by activating the  
Area Code Predialling function. In VoIP calls,  
the area code entered is then prefixed to  
all numbers that do not start with 0 – even  
when dialling numbers from the directory  
and other lists.  
SIP port  
Specify the local communication port  
that the phone should use to send and  
receive signalling data. Specify a  
number between 1024 and 49152.  
The default port number for SIP signal-  
ling is 5060.  
¤ Enter your area code in the Area Code  
RTP port  
¤ fCileicldk,oen.gt.h0e8Y9e.s option next to Predial  
area code for local calls through VoIP to  
activate the function.  
Specify the local communication port  
that the phone should use to send and  
receive voice data. Enter an even  
number between 1024 and 49152. The  
port number must not be the same as  
the port number in the SIP port field.  
If you enter an odd number, the even  
number just below it will be set  
(e.g. if you enter 5003, 5002 is set).  
The default port number for voice  
transmission is 5004.  
If you click on No you must enter the  
area code even for local calls via VoIP.  
Numbers in the directory must always  
contain the area code for dialling via  
¤ VColicIPk. on Set to save the settings.  
Please note that if the option is activated, the  
area code is prefixed to all phone numbers that  
do not start with 0 and are dialled via VoIP. This  
is especially the case for numbers of the net-  
work answer machine (page 55) and, if the  
Emergency calls always via fixed line option is  
deactivated (see below), for emergency num-  
bers.  
Use random ports  
Click on the Yes option if you do not  
want the phone to use fixed ports for  
SIP port and RTP port, but rather to use  
any free ports.  
The use of random ports makes sense if  
you want several phones to be oper-  
ated on the same router with NAT. The  
phones must then use different ports  
so that the router's NAT is only able to  
forward incoming calls and voice data  
to one (the intended) phone.  
If you click on No, the phone will use  
the ports specified in SIP port and RTP  
¤ pNoorwt. click on Set to save your settings.  
87  
                 
Web configurator  
Changing settings for dialling  
emergency numbers  
Loading/deleting directories  
into/from the PC  
You can store up to five emergency num-  
bers in your telephone. The default setting  
for the phone is that these emergency  
numbers are always dialled via the fixed  
network – irrespective of which connec-  
tion type you select. The fixed network  
supports general emergency numbers  
(e.g. establishing a connection to the  
local police emergency number).  
The Web configurator has the following  
options for editing the directories of the  
registered handbooks.  
u Store the handset directories on a PC.  
They will be stored in tsv-ASCII files (tsv  
= tabulator separated values). These  
files can be edited with an ASCII editor  
(e.g. Notepad/Editor in Windows acces-  
sories) and loaded onto every handset  
that is registered. You can also transfer  
directory entries from the tsv file into  
your Outlook™ address book.  
You can deactivate the setting for emer-  
gency numbers to always be dialled via  
the fixed network.  
Emergency numbers may have been pre-  
set in your phone. They are displayed on  
the Dialing Plans Web page. You can  
u Transfer Outlook™ contacts to the  
handset directories. Export Outlook™  
fer this into the directories. Find out  
how to do this in the section "Format of  
the directory file (tsv file)" on page 89.  
change the emergency phone numbers.  
Warning:  
If you deactivate the Emergency calls always  
via fixed line option, make sure that your  
VoIP provider supports emergency num-  
bers, such as the local police emergency  
number.  
u Delete the directory on the handset. If  
you have edited the directory file (tsv  
file) on the PC and would like to use this  
modified directory on the handset, you  
can delete the current directory from  
the handset first. Tip: Back up the cur-  
rent directory on your PC before delet-  
ing it. You can then load it back onto  
the handset if the modified directory is  
affected by formatting errors and  
some, or all, of it cannot be loaded onto  
the handset.  
Emergency numbers cannot be dialled if  
the key lock is activated. Before dialling,  
press and hold the hash key #, to  
release the key lock.  
The preconfigured emergency numbers  
are displayed in the Emergency Numbers  
area.  
¤ Enter the emergency numbers in the  
empty fields and edit emergency num-  
Preconditions:  
¤ bIfeyrosuthcalictkhoavneNaolrneeaxdtytobEeemneregnetnecryecda.lls  
always via fixed line, the emergency  
numbers are dialled via the type of con-  
nection you specify when dialling (by  
pressing the talk key c briefly or  
pressing and holding).  
u The handset can send and receive  
directory entries.  
u The directory on the handset is not  
being accessed, i.e. the directory is not  
¤ oOppeenn.the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Telephony ¢ Telephone  
Directory.  
¤ In the Handset area, select the handset  
whose directory you want to edit. To do  
this, click on the option before the  
handset.  
If you click on the Yes option, your  
phone will always dial emergency num-  
bers via the fixed network (fixed line)  
(default setting).  
¤ Click on Set to save the settings.  
88  
         
Web configurator  
Load the directory file from the PC to  
the handset  
Format of the directory file (tsv file)  
The following describes the structure of  
the tsv file as it is created from the phone.  
The phone expects the same structure if  
you load a tsv file from the PC onto a hand-  
set. A tsv file created by Outlook™ may  
need editing with an ASCII editor before it  
can be loaded onto a handset.  
¤ In the File for upload field: enter the tsv  
file (complete path name) that is to be  
loaded onto the handset. Click on the  
Browse button to navigate to the file.  
¤ Click on the Upload button to start the  
transfer.  
Every directory entry in the tsv file is  
recorded in one line (which is closed with  
an end-of-line symbol).  
The display will show how many of the  
entries from the tsv file are being trans-  
ferred to the directory. If a formatting  
error occurs, the line number for the  
affected entry will be specified.  
The data in each entry has a specific posi-  
tion within the line. The positions are sep-  
arated by tabs (<tab>). The following data  
is written in the file in the specified order:  
Transfer rules  
The directory entries from a tsv file that  
are loaded onto the handset will be added  
to the directory. No directory entries will  
be overwritten or deleted.  
1. Internal code (can remain empty)  
2. Name  
3. Number  
4. Anniversary date (DD.MM.) and the  
time of the reminder call (HH:MM) sep-  
arated by a space  
If the phone number for a directory entry  
is identical to the phone number for an  
entry in the tsv file, the entry is not copied  
to the handset.  
5. Number of the melody that has been  
set for the reminder call on the anniver-  
sary (number between 0 and 9;  
0 = optical signalling)  
Loading the directory from the  
handset to the PC  
6. Status of the reminder call (1=on)  
¤ In the Handset Directory area click on the  
Download button. A Windows dialogue  
will be shown to save the file.  
7. Number of the VIP melody  
(number between 0 and 9)  
8. SMS mailbox address (number be-  
tween 0 and 9)  
¤ Enter the directory on the PC (complete  
path name) in which the directory file is  
to be stored. Click on the Save button or  
OK.  
If one of the above parameters in a direc-  
tory entry is not set, then the relevant  
position must remain empty  
(<tab><tab>).  
Deleting the directory  
Example:  
¤ In the Handset Directory area, click on  
¤ tChoenDfiermletethbeupttroonm. pt Telephone directory  
of the selected handset will be deleted. Con-  
tinue? with OK.  
You want to create an entry for Anna Sand  
with the number 123456. Anna Sand  
should be entered as a VIP (no anniver-  
sary).  
The tsv file must contain the following in a  
line:  
<tab>Anna Sand<tab>123456<tab><tab>  
All directory entries will be deleted, inclu-  
ding the entries for the online directories.  
<tab><tab>5<tab><enter>  
Please note:  
For how to delete the directory on the handset,  
see page 31  
89  
           
Web configurator  
¤ In the Messenger Account field, select  
whether you wish to use the Gigaset.net  
Jabber server or another provider's  
messenger server (Other).  
Saving messenger access data  
The messenger client in your base station  
enables instant messaging (immediate  
message transfer, chatting). The phone  
supports the XMPP messenger (Jabber).  
The access data for Gigaset.net are  
already stored in the base station. They  
are displayed in Jabber ID, Authentication  
password and Jabber server. With this  
data you can also register with the  
Gigaset.net Jabber server through your  
PC.  
In order for you to use your phone's mes-  
senger to "go online" and "chat" on the  
Internet, the access data of a messenger  
server must be saved on your phone.  
Your phone is already registered with the  
Gigaset.net Jabber server. An account has  
already been assigned to the phone. You  
via this account. You must also create a  
buddy list on your PC (see "Setting up a  
Gigaset.net Jabber-Account" on page 91).  
¤ Enter the user ID (max. 50 characters)  
and password (max. 20 characters) that  
you used to register with the messen-  
ger server in the Jabber ID and Authenti-  
cation password fields. If you have  
selected Messenger Account = Gigaset.net,  
the fields are preconfigured with your  
You can also register with another instant  
messaging provider that supports XMPP  
Messenger (Jabber). You must then save  
the messenger server address and your  
access data on your phone.  
¤ GInigthaseeJta.nbebterascecrovuenr tf.ield, enter the IP  
address or the DNS name of the mes-  
senger server with which you are regis-  
tered for instant messaging.  
You can define a Resource name and a  
Priority for your phone. Both are required if  
you are logged in (online) with the mes-  
senger server with several devices (phone,  
desktop PC and notebook) at the same  
time using the same Jabber ID.  
Max. 74 alphanumeric characters.  
If you have selected Messenger Account =  
Gigaset.net, the field is preconfigured  
with the name of the Gigaset.net  
¤ sEenrtveerrt.he number of the communica-  
tion port on the Jabber server in the  
Jabber server port field. The default port  
is 5222.  
The Resource name is used to distinguish  
between these devices. The phone cannot  
log in with the messenger server if it does  
not have a resource name.  
If you have selected Messenger Account =  
Gigaset.net, the port number is precon-  
You should assign a Priority, as each mes-  
sage will only be sent to one device for  
each Jabber ID. The Priority determines  
which of the devices receives the mes-  
sage.  
¤ fEingtuerread.resource name (max. 20 char-  
acters) in the Resource field.  
The default is: phone.  
Example: You are online using one of your  
phone's handsets and your PC both at the  
same time. You have assigned your phone  
(Resource-name "phone") the Priority 5 and  
your PC (resource name "PC") the priority  
10. In this case, any message addressed to  
your Jabber ID will be sent to your phone.  
¤ Enter the priority for your phone in the  
field Priority. Select a number between  
128 (highest priority) and 127 (lowest  
priority) for the priority.  
¤ TChlicekdoenfatuhlet iSs:et5button.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ Messenger.  
90  
               
Web configurator  
If the subscriber answers this request pos-  
itively, he is added to your buddy list. The  
updated buddy list will be displayed on  
your handset the next time you restart  
Messenger. To restart: If necessary, close  
your connection to the messenger server  
(page 50) and then go back online  
(page 49).  
Setting up a Gigaset.net Jabber-Account  
Your phone is already registered with the  
Gigaset.net Jabber server. An account has  
already been assigned to the phone.  
In order to chat with other Gigaset.net  
subscribers via this account, you must  
transfer the required Gigaset.net subscrib-  
ers to a contact list (buddy list) on your PC.  
You can use any conventional Jabber cli-  
ent to do this (e.g. PSI, Miranda; see also  
Please note:  
For how to use your handset to go online and  
chat with or call buddies, see page 48.  
In order to use the Gigaset.net Jabber  
account, proceed as follows:  
Making e-mail settings  
¤ Start the Web configurator, open the  
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ Messenger  
Web page and select the Messenger  
Account Gigaset.net field. Your account  
data is displayed in Jabber ID and  
You can use your phone to be notified  
about new e-mail messages on your  
incoming e-mail server (page 45).  
You must store the address/DNS name of  
your incoming e-mail server and your per-  
sonal access data in the phone and acti-  
vate the e-mail request on your incoming  
e-mail server, so that it can connect to the  
incoming e-mail server and your mailbox.  
Authentication password. You need this  
to create a buddy list via the Jabber cli-  
¤ eStnatrot nthyeoJuarbPbCe.r client on your PC.  
¤ Enter your Gigaset.net Jabber ID in the  
Jabber client. The Jabber ID is composed  
of your Gigaset.net number and  
"@jabber.gigaset.net"  
As soon as the data is stored in the phone,  
it will periodically (approx every 15 min-  
utes) connect to the incoming e-mail  
server and check if any new messages  
have been received.  
Example:  
¤ 2N1o7w2e1n1t2e3r9yo0u1r#A9u@thjaebnbticear.tgioingapsaests.wnoertd.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Messaging ¢ E-Mail.  
Please note:  
¤ Enter the user name (account name)  
agreed with the Internet provider  
(max. 50 characters) in the field  
Do not select the "Create new account"  
option. Your Gigaset.net Jabber account  
has already been created in Gigaset.net.  
The "SSL connection" option must be deac-  
tivated in the Jabber client.  
¤ AEnuttheerntthiceatpioanssNwaomred. that you agreed  
with your provider for accessing the  
incoming e-mail server (max. 20 char-  
acters; case sensitive) in the field  
¤ Now you can enter Gigaset.net sub-  
scribers as contacts (buddies).  
For the Jabber ID of each subscriber,  
enter the subscriber's Gigaset.net  
number with "@jabber.gigaset.net"  
(example: 2141524901#9@jab-  
ber.gigaset.net).  
¤ AEnuttheerntthiceantioanmpeasosfwthoredi.ncoming e-mail  
server (POP3 server) (max. 74 charac-  
ters) in the field POP3 Server. Example:  
pop.theserver.com.  
A request to "Add to contact list" is sent to  
the subscriber.  
91  
             
Web configurator  
¤ From the Check for new E-Mail list, select  
the time interval at which your phone  
is to check whether new e-mail mes-  
sages have been received on the  
incoming e-mail server. Select Never to  
deactivate the check. Select one of the  
other values to activate the check for  
new e-mails.  
Please note:  
When updating from the Internet, checks  
are made to ensure that no newer version  
of the firmware exists. If this is not the case,  
the operation is terminated.  
You should not change the URL for the  
Internet server because this address is also  
used to load provider information from the  
Internet. If you have entered another URL,  
you can re-activate the default URL by  
restoring the base station default settings  
(page 66).  
Only activate the check if a messaging-  
capable handset (e.g. Gigaset S45) is  
¤ rCeligcikstoenretdhetoSyeot ubrubttaosnetsotastaioven.the set-  
Conducting the firmware update  
locally  
tings in your phone.  
Please note:  
For how to show the messages from your mail-  
box on your handset, see page 46  
Precondition: A Web server is running on  
the local PC (e.g. Apache).  
¤ First, load the desired version of the  
firmware from the Internet onto a local  
Defining the server for firmware  
updates, starting the update  
¤ PInCt.he User defined firmware file field  
enter the IP address of the PC in your  
local network and the complete path  
and name of the firmware file on the  
PC. Example: 192.168.2.105/S450IP/  
If necessary, you can load updates of the  
base station firmware onto your phone.  
You can either download the updates  
directly from the Internet or from a PC in  
your local network.  
¤ FCilricmkwoanreS_eDt taotesia.bvient.he changes.  
Using the Web configurator you can spec-  
ify from where the firmware should be  
loaded.  
This setting is automatically used for the  
subsequent firmware update. The Inter-  
net server URL stays saved and is re-used  
for further firmware updates. If you want  
to use a local PC again for another update,  
then you have to re-enter the IP address  
and file name.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Miscellaneous.  
Download the firmware update directly  
from the Internet  
Please note:  
The server on which Siemens makes new  
firmware versions available for your base  
station is set by default. The URL of the  
Internet server is displayed in the Data  
server field.  
If an error arises during a firmware update  
from a local PC, the most recent version of the  
firmware is automatically downloaded from  
the Internet.  
The firmware is loaded from the Internet  
if you do not enter a local file in the  
User defined firmware file field before this  
update.  
92  
         
Web configurator  
problems. These messages give you infor-  
mation on the status of a connection and  
contain a provider-specific code that helps  
the service team when they are analysing  
the problem.  
Starting firmware update  
Preconditions:  
u No calls are being made via the fixed  
network or VoIP.  
u There is no internal connection  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
¤ Click on the Yes option after Show VoIP  
status on handset to activate status mes-  
sage display  
between the registered handsets.  
Settings ¢ Miscellaneous.  
u The base station menu is not open in  
¤ aCnliyckoofnthUephdaatnedFsiermtsw. are.  
If you click on No, no VoIP status mes-  
The firmware is updated. This process can  
take up to 3 minutes.  
¤ sCaligceksoanreSedtistoplsaayveed.the changes.  
A table with possible status codes and their  
meaning can be found in the Appendix on  
page 97.  
Please note:  
You can also start the firmware update on the  
handset (page 67).  
Activating/deactivating the  
automatic version check  
Checking status information via  
your phone  
When the version check is activated, the  
phone checks on a daily basis whether the  
Siemens configuration server is carrying a  
new version of the phone firmware or of  
the file with the general settings for your  
VoIP provider.  
General information about your phone is  
displayed.  
¤ In the menu list, click on the Status  
register.  
The following information is displayed:  
If a new version is available, a notification  
is sent to the handset and the message key  
flashes. You can then carry out an auto-  
matic update of the firmware (page 67) or  
of the VoIP provider settings (page 69).  
IP Configuration  
IP address  
The phone's current IP address within  
the local network. For assigning the IP  
address, see page 75.  
¤ Open the following Web page:  
Settings ¢ Miscellaneous.  
MAC address  
¤ Click on the Yes option next to Auto-  
matic check for software/profile updates to  
activate the automatic version check.  
The phone's device address.  
Software  
Firmware version  
Click on No if you do not want a version  
Version of the firmware currently  
downloaded. You can download  
updates of the firmware on your phone  
(page 67). Firmware updates are avail-  
able on the Internet.  
check to be carried out.  
¤ Click on Set to save the changes.  
Activating VoIP status message  
display  
EEPROM version  
Version of your phone's EEPROM stor-  
age chip (page 113).  
Display VoIP status messages on your  
handset when there are VoIP connection  
93  
                           
Appendix  
Questions and answers  
Appendix  
If you have any questions about using  
your phone, visit us at any time at  
The table below contains a list of common  
problems and possible solutions.  
Care  
¤ Wipe down the base station and hand-  
set with a damp cloth (no solvents) or  
an antistatic cloth.  
Please note:  
To support the service team, it can be helpful if  
you have the following information to hand:  
Never use a dry cloth. This can cause a  
build up of static.  
Version of firmware, EEPROM and your  
phone's MAC address  
!
Contact with liquid  
You can check this information with the  
Web configurator (page 93). For how to  
display the MAC address on your handset,  
turn to page 70.  
If the handset has come into contact with  
liquid:  
VoIP status code (page 97)  
¤ Switch the handset off and remove  
For problems with VoIP connections, you  
should set VoIP status messages to be dis-  
played on your handset. (page 69,  
page 93). These messages contain a status  
code that helps when the problem is ana-  
lysed.  
¤ tAhlleowbatthteerliiqeusiidmtomderdaiiantferolym. the hand-  
¤ sPeatt.all parts dry, then with the battery  
compartment open and the keypad fac-  
ing down place the handset in a dry,  
warm place for at least 72 hours (not  
The display is blank.  
¤ iDnoanmoitcsrowwitacvhe,oonvtehneehtca.n).dset again  
1. The handset is not switched on.  
¥
Press and hold the end call key a.  
until it is completely dry.  
2. The battery is flat.  
¥
Charge the battery or replace it  
(page 7).  
When it has fully dried out, you will nor-  
mally be able to use it again.  
The keys of a handset do not respond when  
pressed.  
The key lock is activated.  
¥
Press and hold the hash key #  
(page 23).  
Base "X" flashes on the display.  
1. The handset is outside the range of the  
base station.  
¥
Move the handset closer to the base  
station.  
2. The base station is not switched on.  
¥
Check the base station's mains adapter  
3. An update of the base station firmware is  
currently being conducted (page 67/  
page 92).  
¥
Please wait until the update is complete.  
94  
             
Appendix  
Base Search flashes in the display.  
You cannot connect to the router and the  
phone is assigned a static IP address.  
The handset is set to Best Base and no base sta-  
tion is switched on or within range.  
¥
Check on the router whether the IP address  
is already being used by another device in  
the LAN or belongs to the block of IP  
addresses that is reserved on the router for  
dynamic address assignment.  
If necessary, change the phone's IP address  
(page 70).  
¥
¥
Move the handset closer to the base sta-  
tion.  
Check the base station mains adapter.  
Please register flashes in the display.  
¥
The handset is not registered.  
¥
Register the handset (page 56).  
You have made a call via VoIP but cannot  
hear the other participant.  
Handset does not ring.  
Your phone is connected to a router with NAT/  
firewall.  
The ringer tone is switched off.  
¥
Activate the ringer tone (page 63).  
¥
Your STUN server (page 81) or outbound  
proxy (page 81) settings are incomplete or  
incorrect. Check the settings.  
You cannot hear a ring/dialling tone from  
the fixed network.  
¥
No outbound proxy is entered or the out-  
bound proxy mode Never is activated  
(page 81) and your phone is connected to a  
router with symmetric NAT or a blocking  
firewall.  
Base station's phone cord has been replaced.  
¥
When purchasing a new cord, ensure that it  
has the correct pin connections (page 11).  
The other party cannot hear you.  
¥
Port forwarding is activated on your router,  
but no permanent IP address has been  
assigned to your phone.  
You have pressed the u (INT) key. The hand-  
set is "muted".  
¥
Switch on the microphone again (page 22).  
You cannot make calls via VoIP. Server not  
accessible! is displayed.  
When making calls from the fixed network,  
the caller's phone number is not displayed  
although CLIP (page 21) is set.  
¥
First wait a few minutes. This is often a  
short-term event that corrects itself after a  
short time.  
Phone number identification is not enabled.  
¥
The caller should ask his network provider  
to enable Calling Line Identification (CLI).  
If the message is still displayed, proceed as fol-  
lows:  
You hear an error tone when keying an  
input  
(a descending tone sequence).  
¥
¥
¥
Check whether your phone's Ethernet cable  
is correctly connected to the router.  
Check your router's cable connection to the  
Internet.  
Check whether the phone is connected to  
the LAN. Set a ping command, for example,  
on the phone (ping s <local IP address of  
the phone>). It may be that no IP address  
could be assigned to the phone or a perma-  
nently set IP address is already assigned to  
another LAN subscriber. Check the settings  
on the router, you may have to activate the  
DHCP server.  
Action has failed/invalid input.  
¥
Repeat the operation.  
Watch the display and refer to the user  
guide if necessary.  
95  
Appendix  
You cannot make calls via VoIP. Either  
Provider registration failed! or Registration failed is  
shown.  
No firmware update or VoIP profile down-  
load is carried out.  
1. If Currently not possible! is displayed, the VoIP  
connections may be busy or a download/  
update is already being carried out.  
¥
First wait a few minutes. This is often a  
short-term event that corrects itself after a  
short time.  
¥
Repeat the process at a later time.  
The message may still be displayed for the fol-  
lowing reasons:  
2. If File corrupted! is displayed, the firmware or  
profile file may be invalid.  
1. The personal VoIP access data (Username,  
Authent. Name and Authent. Password) you  
have entered may be incomplete or wrong.  
¥
Please use only firmware and down-  
loads that are made available on the  
preconfigured Siemens server  
¥
Check your information. In particular,  
check your use of upper and lower case.  
2. The general settings for your VoIP provider  
are incomplete or incorrect (incorrect  
server address).  
3. If Server not accessible! is displayed, the  
download server may not be accessible.  
¥
¥
The server is currently not accessible.  
Repeat the process at a later time.  
You have changed the preconfigured  
server address (page 92). Correct the  
address. If necessary, reset the base sta-  
tion.  
¥
Start the Web configurator and check  
the settings.  
You cannot establish a connection to the  
phone with your PC's Web browser.  
¥
When establishing a connection, check the  
phone's local IP address that has been  
entered. You can check the IP address on  
your handset.  
4. If Transmission Error XXX is displayed, an  
error has occurred in the transmission of  
the file. An HTTP error code is displayed for  
XXX.  
¥
¥
Check the LAN connections for the PC and  
phone.  
Check that your phone can be reached. Set  
a ping command, for example, on the  
phone (ping s <local IP address of the  
phone>).  
¥
Repeat the process. If the error occurs  
again, consult the Service department.  
5. If Check IP settings! is displayed, your phone  
may not be connected to the Internet.  
¥
Check the cable connections between  
the phone and router and between the  
router and the Internet.  
¥
You have tried to reach the phone via a  
secure http (https://...). Try again with  
http://....  
¥
Check whether the phone is connected  
to the LAN, i.e. it can be reached at its IP  
address.  
You cannot be reached for calls from the  
Internet.  
¥
There is no entry for your phone in your  
router's routing table. Check the settings  
for the NAT refresh time (page 81).  
Your phone is not registered with the VoIP  
provider.  
¥
¥
You have entered the wrong user ID or an  
incorrect domain (page 79).  
96  
Appendix  
VoIP status codes  
Status Meaning  
code  
If you have problems with your VoIP con-  
nections, activate the Show Stat. on HS  
function (page 69, page 93). You will then  
receive a VoIP status code that will support  
you in problem analysis. Also enter the  
code during problem analysis by the Serv-  
ice department.  
0x403 The requested service is not sup-  
ported by the VoIP provider.  
0x404 Wrong phone number.  
No subscriber to this number.  
Example: In a local call you have not  
dialled the area code although your  
VoIP provider does not support local  
calls  
In the following tables you will find the  
meanings of the most important status  
codes and messages.  
0x405 Method not permitted.  
0x406 Not acceptable.  
The requested service cannot be pro-  
vided.  
Status Meaning  
code  
0x300 The called party can be reached  
under several phone numbers. If the  
VoIP provider supports this, a list of  
the phone numbers is transmitted as  
well as the status code. The caller can  
select to which number he/she wants  
to make the connection.  
0x407 Proxy authentication required.  
0x408 The party cannot be reached  
(e.g. account has been deleted)  
0x410 The requested service is not available  
from the VoIP provider.  
0x413 Message is too long.  
0x414 URI is too long.  
0x301 Permanently redirected.  
The called party can no longer be  
reached under this number. The new  
number is transmitted to the phone  
together with the status code, and  
the phone then no longer accesses  
the old number but dials the new  
address immediately.  
0x415 Query format is not supported.  
0x416 URI is faulty.  
0x420 Incorrect ending  
0x421 Incorrect ending  
0x423 The requested service is not sup-  
ported by the VoIP provider.  
0x302 Temporarily redirected.  
The phone is informed that the called  
party cannot be reached under the  
number dialled. The duration of redi-  
recting is time-limited. The phone is  
also informed of the duration of redi-  
recting.  
0x480 The dialled number is temporarily  
unavailable.  
0x481 The recipient is not available.  
0x482 Double service query  
0x305 The query is redirected to another  
proxy server, e.g. to balance query  
loads. The phone will make the same  
query once again to another proxy  
server. This is not a redirection of the  
address per se.  
0x483 Too many "hops":  
The query was rejected because the  
service server (proxy) has decided  
that this query has already run  
through too many service servers.  
The maximum number was previ-  
ously specified by the original sender  
of the query.  
0x380 Other service:  
The query or the call could not be  
made. But the phone is notified what  
other options there are to be able to  
connect the call.  
0x484 Wrong number:  
In most cases this response means  
that you have simply omitted one or  
more digits in the phone number.  
0x400 Wrong call  
0x485 The URI dialled is not unique and can  
not be processed by the VoIP pro-  
vider.  
0x401 Not authorised  
97  
   
Appendix  
Status Meaning  
code  
Status Meaning  
code  
0x486 The called party is busy.  
0x504 Time limit at the gateway  
0x487 General faults:  
0x505 The server rejects the query because  
the indicated version number of the  
SIP protocol does not at least concur  
with the version that the server or the  
SIP device use that is involved in this  
query.  
The call was interrupted before a call  
was established. The status code con-  
firms receipt of the interruption sig-  
nal.  
0x488 The server cannot process the query  
because the data entered in the  
0x515 The server rejects the query because  
the message exceeds the maximum  
permitted size.  
media description is not compatible.  
0x491 The server notifies that the query will  
be processed as soon as a previous  
query has been completed.  
0x600 The called party is busy.  
0x603 The called party has rejected the call.  
0x604 The called URI does not exist.  
0x493 The server rejects the query because  
the phone cannot decrypt the mes-  
sage. The sender has used an encryp-  
tion method that neither the server  
nor the receiver phone can decrypt.  
0x606 The communication settings are not  
acceptable.  
0x701 The called party has hung up.  
0x500 The proxy or the receiving device has  
discovered a fault while executing  
the query, which makes further exe-  
cution of the query impossible. In this  
case, the caller or the phone displays  
the fault and repeats the query after  
a few seconds. The number of sec-  
onds after which the query can be  
repeated may be transmitted to the  
caller or phone by the receiving  
device.  
0x703 Connection interrupted because of  
time-out.  
0x704 Connection interrupted because of a  
SIP error  
0x705 Wrong dialling tone  
0x706 No connection established  
0x751 Busy tone:  
No codec match between the calling  
and called subscribers.  
0x501 The query cannot be processed by  
the recipient because the recipient  
does not have the functionality that  
the caller requires. If the recipient  
understands the query but does not  
process it because the sender does  
not have the necessary rights or the  
query is not permitted in the current  
context, a 405 is sent instead of 501.  
0x810 General Socket Layer Error: User is  
not authorised.  
0x811 General Socket Layer Error:  
Wrong Socket Number  
0x812 General Socket Layer Error: Socket is  
not connected.  
0x813 General Socket Layer Error:  
Memory error  
0x502 In this case, the receiving device that  
transmits this error code is a proxy or  
a gateway and has received an invalid  
response from its gateway via which  
this query is to be processed.  
0x814 General Socket Layer Error: Socket  
not available – check IP settings/con-  
nection problem/VoIP setting incor-  
rect  
0x503 The query cannot currently be proc-  
essed by the receiving device or the  
proxy because the server is either  
overloaded or is being serviced. If it is  
possible for the query to be repeated  
in the foreseeable future, the server  
informs the caller or the phone of  
this.  
0x815 General Socket Layer Error:  
Illegal application on the socket inter-  
face.  
98  
Appendix  
Searching for service  
information  
Service (Customer Care)  
We offer you support that is fast and tai-  
lored to your specific needs!  
You may need the service information of  
your phone (base station and handset) for  
Customer Services.  
Our Online Support on the Internet:  
Base station service information  
Precondition: You are conducting an  
external call. The connection has been  
For more information on aftersales serv-  
ice, please refer to your local warranty  
card.  
e§Ospttaiobnlsis§ ¢hedSfeorvriacet lIenafost 8 sec.  
In some countries repair and replace serv-  
ices are impossible where the products are  
not sold through our authorised dealers.  
Confirm selection with §OK§.  
The following information is displayed:  
1: Serial number of the base station (RFPI)  
2: Serial number of your handset (IPUI)  
Please address any questions about DSL  
access and VoIP access to the respective  
service provider.  
3: Informs the service employees of the  
base station settings (in hex diagram),  
e.g. the number of registered handsets,  
repeater mode. The last 4 digits indicate  
the number of operating hours (hexadeci-  
mal).  
Specifications  
Recommended batteries  
(Valid at the time of going to press)  
Nickel-metal-hydride (NiMH):  
u Sanyo Twicell 650  
u Sanyo Twicell 700  
u Panasonic 700 mAh "for DECT"  
u GP 700mAh  
u Yuasa Technology AAA Phone 700  
u VARTA Phone Power AAA 700mAh  
u GP 850mAh  
u Sanyo NiMH 800  
u Yuasa Technology AAA 800  
4: Variant, version of the firmware (digits 3  
to 5).  
5: Gigaset.net number of your phone.  
With this number you can call a service  
employee over the Internet without need-  
ing to be registered with a VoIP provider.  
This means that he/she can test online  
connections and VoIP telephony irrespec-  
tive of the VoIP provider.  
Service information of the handset  
In the handset idle status:  
Open the menu by pressing v  
The handset is supplied with two recom-  
mended batteries.  
¤ Press the following keys one after the  
other: *#QL#  
The following information is displayed via  
the handset:  
1: Serial number (IPUI)  
2: Number of operating hours  
3: Variant, version of handset software  
99  
                     
Appendix  
Handset operating times/charging  
times  
Codecs  
G711, G726, G729AB with  
VAD/CNG  
Quality of Service TOS, DiffServ  
The following information relates to bat-  
teries with a capacity of 650 mAh.  
Protocols  
DECT, GAP, SIP, RTP, DHCP,  
NAT Traversal (STUN),  
HTTP  
Standby time  
Talktime  
around 170 hours (7 days)  
around 13 hours  
Symbols  
Charging time  
around 6 hours  
This section explains the meaning of cer-  
tain symbols and typographical conven-  
tions that are used in this user guide.  
The operating and charging times apply  
only when using the recommended bat-  
teries.  
Copy Entry / Copy List (example)  
Select one of the two specified  
menu functions.  
Please note:  
When the display backlight is switched on, the  
standby time of the handset is reduced to  
around 30 hours.  
~
Enter digits or letters.  
§Save§  
The display keys' current func-  
tions are shown reverse high-  
lighted in the bottom display  
line. Press the display key  
Base station power consumption  
Depending on current status, around  
2.5 W.  
below to launch the function.  
q
r
Press the control key at the top  
or bottom: scroll up or down.  
General specifications  
Press the control key on the  
right or left: e.g. select set-  
ting.  
Interfaces  
Fixed network, Ethernet  
60 duplex channels  
No. of channels  
Radio frequency- 1880–1900 MHz  
range  
c / Q / * etc.  
Press the matching key on the  
handset.  
Duplex method  
Time multiplex,  
10 ms frame length  
Channel grid  
Bit rate  
1728 kHz  
1152 kbit/s  
GFSK  
Example of a menu input  
Modulation  
Language code  
The steps you need to perform are shown  
in abbreviated form in the user guide. This  
is illustrated below using the example of  
"Setting the contrast for the display". The  
things you have to do are explained in the  
boxes.  
32 kbit/s  
Transmission  
power  
10 mW, average power per  
channel  
Range  
up to 300 m outdoors,  
up to 50 m in buildings  
Base station  
230 V ~/50 Hz  
power supply  
Environmental  
conditions in oper-  
ation  
+5 °C to +45 °C;  
20% to 75% humidity  
Dialling mode  
DTMF (touch tone dial-  
ling)/DP (dial pulsing)  
Flash time  
250 ms  
100  
           
Appendix  
Example: multiple line input  
v ¢Ð Settings ¢Display  
¤ With the handset in idle status, press  
In many situations you can change set-  
tings or enter data in several lines of a dis-  
play.  
on the right of the control key to open  
¤ tUhseemthaeincomnetrnoul.key to select the  
Ð Settings line – by pressing the con-  
trol key repeatedly up or down until  
In this user guide symbols are used to  
guide you step by step through multiple  
line input. This is illustrated below using  
the example of "Setting the date and  
time". The things you have to do are  
explained in the boxes.  
¤ tPhreesms tehneudfisupnlcatyiokneyis§OsKe§lteoccteodn.firm the  
selection.  
The Settings submenu is displayed.  
To change the time, open the input field  
wvith¢: Ð Settings ¢Date/Time  
¤ Press up or down on the control key  
repeatedly until the Display menu func-  
¤ tPiroenssisthseeldeicstpelda.y key §OK§ to confirm the  
You will see the following display  
(example):  
selection.  
Date/Time  
Date:  
[10.06.06]  
Time:  
Contrast  
Select and press §OK§.  
11:11  
¤ Press the control key at the bottom  
Ý
Save  
until the Contrast menu function is  
¤ sPerelescsttehde.display key §OK§ to confirm the  
Date:  
Enter day, month and year in 6-digit  
format.  
selection.  
The second line is marked with [ ] to  
show it is active.  
r
Select contrast.  
¤ Enter the date using the digit keys.  
¤ Press on the right or left of the control  
key to set the contrast.  
Time:  
¤ PErnetsesrthhoeusrs/mkineyu.tes in 4-digits format.  
§Save§  
Press the display key.  
¤ Press the display key §Save§ to save the  
The fourth line is marked with [ ] to show  
it is active.  
setting.  
¤ Enter the date using the digit keys.  
a
Press and hold (idle status).  
¤ Save the changes.  
¤ Press and hold the end call key until the  
handset returns to idle status.  
¤ Press the display key §Save§.  
¤ Then press and hold the a key.  
The handset switches to idle status.  
101  
       
Appendix  
u The display shows whether upper case,  
lower case or digits is selected. "Abc",  
"abc" or "123" appears at the top right  
of the display.  
Writing and editing text  
The following rules apply when writing a  
text:  
u When you press and hold a key, the  
characters of the corresponding key are  
displayed in the bottom display line  
and marked one after another. When  
you release the key, the highlighted  
character is inserted into the input  
field.  
u Control the cursor with u v t  
s.  
u Characters are inserted on the left of  
the cursor.  
u Press the star key  
to show the  
table of special characters.  
*
u The first letter of the name of directory  
entries is automatically capitalised, fol-  
lowed by lower case letters.  
Writing SMS (with predictive text)  
EATONI predictive text helps you when  
you are writing SMS messages.  
Entering special characters  
Each key between Q and O is  
assigned several letters and characters  
(see special characters, page 102). These  
appear in a selection line immediately  
under the text panel (over the display  
keys) as soon as you press a key. The letter  
you are most likely looking for is shown in  
reversed highlights and is at the begin-  
ning of the selection line. It is copied into  
the text panel.  
¤ Press the star key *.  
A table is opened containing all the  
special characters. The cursor is on the  
character " . " (full stop).  
s
_
)
!
;
?
:
@
§.§  
/
,
"
¤
(
-
+
&
%
*
=
<
>
£
^
$
¿
¥
¡
â
[
]
§
#
Â
\
~
{
}
|
1
2
¤ Navigate to the required character with  
the control key r, q. Example: To  
select @, press v four times and t  
1(1)  
Ç
Abc  
Hello Peter, I cannot come  
today. Wh  
3
4
¤ tPwreiscse.the display key §Insert§. The charac-  
ter is inserted into the text.  
hgi  
Pressing again closes the table  
X
Options  
without inserting a character  
1 EATONI is activated  
2 Upper/lower case or digits  
3 SMS text  
Writing a text/name (without predictive  
text)  
4 Selection line  
Press and hold the hash key # to switch  
from "Abc" mode to "123" and from "123"  
to "abc" and from "abc" to "Abc" (upper  
case: 1st letter upper case, all others lower  
case). Press the hash key # before  
entering the letter.  
If this letter is the one you want, confirm it  
by pressing the next key. If it does not  
match the one you want, press the hash  
key # briefly until the letter you are  
looking for is reverse highlighted in the  
display line and then transferred to the  
text field.  
The following applies when writing an  
SMS/Messenger message:  
If you press and hold the hash key #  
you switch from "Abc" mode to "123" and  
102  
           
Appendix  
from "123" to "abc" and from "abc" to  
"Abc".  
Gigaset S450 IP – free software  
Your Gigaset S450 IP's firmware includes  
free software that is licensed under the  
GNU Lesser General Public License. This  
free software was developed by a third  
party and is protected by copyright. You  
will find the licence text in its original Eng-  
lish version on the pages that follow.  
¤ You are writing an SMS (page 37) or a  
Messenger message (page 53).  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Predictive Text  
Select and press §OK§ (½ = on).  
The software is provided free of charge.  
You are authorised to use this free soft-  
ware in accordance with the above-men-  
tioned licence conditions. In the event of  
contradictions between these licence con-  
ditions and the licence conditions that  
apply for the software according to Sie-  
mens Home and Office Communication  
Devices GmbH & Co. KG, the above-men-  
tioned licence conditions shall take prece-  
dence for the free software.  
a
Press the end call key briefly  
to return to the text field.  
Enter the text.  
Setting input language  
¤ You are writing an SMS (page 37) or a  
Messenger message (page 53).  
§Options§  
Press the display key.  
Select Language  
Select and press §OK§.  
s
Select input language and  
press §OK§.  
The GNU Lesser General Public License  
(LGPL) is supplied with this product. You  
can also download the licence conditions  
from the Internet:  
a
Press the end call key briefly  
twice to return to the text  
panel.  
u The LGPL is available on the Internet at:  
The input language setting only applies to  
the current SMS.  
u The source text, including copyright  
notices for free software, is currently  
available on the Internet at:  
Order of directory entries  
The directory entries are usually sorted in  
alphabetical order. Spaces and digits take  
first priority. The sort order is as follows:  
For more information and Internet links to  
the source text of the free software, see  
the Online Support pages on the Internet  
at:  
1. Space  
2. Digits (0–9)  
3. Letters (alphabetical)  
4. Other characters  
To get round the alphabetical order of the  
entries, insert a space or a digit in front of  
the name. These entries will then move to  
the beginning of the directory. Names that  
you have prefixed with a star will move to  
the end of the directory.  
103  
             
Appendix  
If it is not already supplied with the prod-  
uct, you can request the source text,  
including copyright notices, from Sie-  
mens. There is a charge to cover the cost  
of copying and postage. Please submit this  
request by e-mail or fax to the following  
address or fax number within 3 years of  
purchasing this product. Please state the  
exact device type plus the version number  
of the installed device software.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC  
LICENSE  
Version 2.1, February 1999  
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foun-  
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos-  
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute  
verbatim copies of this license document, but  
changing it is not allowed.  
[This is the first released version of the Lesser  
GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU  
Library Public License, version 2, hence the ver-  
sion number 2.1.]  
Small Parts Dispatch Com Bocholt  
Preamble  
Fax:  
02871 / 91 30 29  
The licenses for most software are designed to  
take away your freedom to share and change it.  
By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses  
are intended to guarantee your freedom to  
share and change free software--to make sure  
the software is free for all its users.  
This license, the Lesser General Public License,  
applies to some specially designated software  
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Soft-  
ware Foundation and other authors who decide  
to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you  
first think carefully about whether this license  
or the ordinary General Public License is the  
better strategy to use in any particular case,  
based on the explanations below.  
Use of the free software contained in this  
product extending beyond the program  
sequence intended by Siemens is at the  
user's own risk – i.e. there shall be no  
claims for liability for defects against Sie-  
mens Home and Office Communication  
Devices GmbH & Co. KG. The GNU Lesser  
General Public License contains notes  
regarding the author's liability for defects  
or that of other proprietors of the free  
software.  
You shall have no right to assert a claim  
against Siemens Home and Office Com-  
munication Devices GmbH & Co. KG based  
on liability for defects, if a defect in the  
product is or could be due to changes you  
have made to the programs or their con-  
figuration. Furthermore, you shall have no  
right to assert a claim against Siemens  
Home and Office Communication Devices  
GmbH & Co. KG based on liability for  
defects if the free software violates the  
copyright of third parties.  
When we speak of free software, we are refer-  
ring to freedom of use, not price. Our General  
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that  
you have the freedom to distribute copies of  
free software (and charge for this service if you  
wish); that you receive source code or can get it  
if you want it; that you can change the software  
and use pieces of it in new free programs; and  
that you are informed that you can do these  
things.  
To protect your rights, we need to make restric-  
tions that forbid distributors to deny you these  
rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.  
These restrictions translate to certain responsi-  
bilities for you if you distribute copies of the  
library or if you modify it.  
For example, if you distribute copies of the  
library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must  
give the recipients all the rights that we gave  
you. You must make sure that they, too, receive  
or can get the source code. If you link other  
code with the library, you must provide com-  
plete object files to the recipients, so that they  
can relink them with the library after making  
changes to the library and recompiling it. And  
you must show them these terms so they know  
their rights.  
Siemens shall not provide technical sup-  
port for the software, including the free  
software included within it, if it has been  
changed.  
104  
Appendix  
We protect your rights with a two-step method:  
(1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer  
you this license, which gives you legal permis-  
sion to copy, distribute and/or modify the  
library.  
To protect each distributor, we want to make it  
very clear that there is no warranty for the free  
library. Also, if the library is modified by some-  
one else and passed on, the recipients should  
know that what they have is not the original  
version, so that the original author's reputation  
will not be affected by problems that might be  
introduced by others.  
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat  
to the existence of any free program. We wish  
to make sure that a company cannot effectively  
restrict the users of a free program by obtaining  
a restrictive license from a patent holder. There-  
fore, we insist that any patent license obtained  
for a version of the library must be consistent  
with the full freedom of use specified in this  
license.  
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is  
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public  
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General  
Public License, applies to certain designated  
libraries, and is quite different from the ordi-  
nary General Public License. We use this license  
for certain libraries in order to permit linking  
those libraries into non-free programs.  
When a program is linked with a library, whe-  
ther statically or using a shared library, the  
combination of the two is legally speaking a  
combined work, a derivative of the original  
library. The ordinary General Public License  
therefore permits such linking only if the entire  
combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Les-  
ser General Public License permits more lax cri-  
teria for linking other code with the library.  
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public  
License because it does Less to protect the  
user's freedom than the ordinary General Public  
License. It also provides other free software  
developers Less of an advantage over compe-  
ting non-free programs. These disadvantages  
are the reason we use the ordinary General  
Public License for many libraries. However, the  
Lesser license provides advantages in certain  
special circumstances.  
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a  
special need to encourage the widest possible  
use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-  
facto standard. To achieve this, non-free pro-  
grams must be allowed to use the library. A  
more frequent case is that a free library does  
the same job as widely used non-free libraries.  
In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the  
free library to free software only, so we use the  
Lesser General Public License.  
In other cases, permission to use a particular  
library in non-free programs enables a greater  
number of people to use a large body of free  
software. For example, permission to use the  
GNU C Library in non-free programs enables  
many more people to use the whole GNU ope-  
rating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/  
Linux operating system.  
Although the Lesser General Public License is  
Less protective of the users' freedom, it does  
ensure that the user of a program that is linked  
with the Library has the freedom and the whe-  
rewithal to run that program using a modified  
version of the Library.  
The precise terms and conditions for copying,  
distribution and modification follow. Pay close  
attention to the difference between a "work  
based on the library" and a "work that uses the  
library". The former contains code derived from  
the library, whereas the latter must be combi-  
ned with the library in order to run.  
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE  
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DIS-  
TRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION  
0. This License Agreement applies to any soft-  
ware library or other program which contains a  
notice placed by the copyright holder or other  
authorized party saying it may be distributed  
under the terms of this Lesser General Public  
License (also called "this License"). Each licen-  
see is addressed as "you".  
A "library" means a collection of software func-  
tions and/or data prepared so as to be conveni-  
ently linked with application programs (which  
use some of those functions and data) to form  
executables.  
The "Library", below, refers to any such soft-  
ware library or work which has been distributed  
under these terms. A "work based on the  
Library" means either the Library or any deriva-  
tive work under copyright law: that is to say, a  
work containing the Library or a portion of it,  
either verbatim or with modifications and/or  
translated straightforwardly into another lan-  
guage. (Hereinafter, translation is included wit-  
hout limitation in the term "modification".)  
"Source code" for a work means the preferred  
form of the work for making modifications to it.  
For a library, complete source code means all  
the source code for all modules it contains, plus  
any associated interface definition files, plus  
the scripts used to control compilation and  
installation of the library.  
105  
Appendix  
Activities other than copying, distribution and  
modification are not covered by this License;  
they are outside its scope. The act of running a  
program using the Library is not restricted, and  
output from such a program is covered only if  
its contents constitute a work based on the  
Library (independent of the use of the Library in  
a tool for writing it). Whether that is true  
depends on what the Library does and what the  
program that uses the Library does.  
rate works in themselves, then this License, and  
its terms, do not apply to those sections when  
you distribute them as separate works. But  
when you distribute the same sections as part  
of a whole which is a work based on the Library,  
the distribution of the whole must be on the  
terms of this License, whose permissions for  
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and  
thus to each and every part regardless of who  
wrote it.  
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies  
of the Library's complete source code as you  
receive it, in any medium, provided that you  
conspicuously and appropriately publish on  
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and  
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the  
notices that refer to this License and to the  
absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy  
of this License along with the Library.  
You may charge a fee for the physical act of  
transferring a copy, and you may at your option  
offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.  
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the  
Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work  
based on the Library, and copy and distribute  
such modifications or work under the terms of  
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all  
of these conditions:  
a) The modified work must itself be a software  
library.  
b) You must cause the files modified to carry  
prominent notices stating that you changed the  
files and the date of any change.  
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be  
licensed at no charge to all third parties under  
the terms of this License.  
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim  
rights or contest your rights to work written  
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise  
the right to control the distribution of derivative  
or collective works based on the Library.  
In addition, mere aggregation of another work  
not based on the Library with the Library (or  
with a work based on the Library) on a volume  
of a storage or distribution medium does not  
bring the other work under the scope of this  
License.  
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordi-  
nary GNU General Public License instead of this  
License to a given copy of the Library. To do  
this, you must alter all the notices that refer to  
this License, so that they refer to the ordinary  
GNU General Public License, version 2, instead  
of to this License. (If a newer version than ver-  
sion 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public  
License has appeared, then you can specify that  
version instead if you wish.) Do not make any  
other change in these notices.  
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is  
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU  
General Public License applies to all subsequent  
copies and derivative works made from that  
copy.  
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a  
function or a table of data to be supplied by an  
application program that uses the facility, other  
than as an argument passed when the facility is  
invoked, then you must make a good faith  
effort to ensure that, in the event an applica-  
tion does not supply such function or table, the  
facility still operates, and performs whatever  
part of its purpose remains meaningful.  
(For example, a function in a library to compute  
square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-  
defined independent of the application. There-  
fore, Subsection 2d requires that any applica-  
tion-supplied function or table used by this  
function must be optional: if the application  
does not supply it, the square root function  
must still compute square roots.)  
This option is useful when you wish to copy part  
of the code of the Library into a program that is  
not a library.  
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a  
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in  
object code or executable form under the terms  
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you  
accompany it with the complete corresponding  
machine-readable source code, which must be  
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2  
above on a medium customarily used for soft-  
ware interchange.  
If distribution of object code is made by offering  
access to copy from a designated place, then  
offering equivalent access to copy the source  
code from the same place satisfies the require-  
ment to distribute the source code, even  
though third parties are not compelled to copy  
the source along with the object code.  
These requirements apply to the modified work  
as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work  
are not derived from the Library, and can be  
reasonably considered independent and sepa-  
106  
Appendix  
5. A program that contains no derivative of any  
portion of the Library, but is designed to work  
with the Library by being compiled or linked  
with it, is called a "work that uses the Library".  
Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative  
work of the Library, and therefore falls outside  
the scope of this License.  
However, linking a "work that uses the Library"  
with the Library creates an executable that is a  
derivative of the Library (because it contains  
portions of the Library), rather than a "work  
that uses the library". The executable is there-  
fore covered by this License.  
the Library including whatever changes were  
used in the work (which must be distributed  
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work  
is an executable linked with the Library, with  
the complete machine-readable "work that uses  
the Library", as object code and/or source code,  
so that the user can modify the Library and then  
relink to produce a modified executable contai-  
ning the modified Library. (It is understood that  
the user who changes the contents of definiti-  
ons files in the Library will not necessarily be  
able to recompile the application to use the  
modified definitions.)  
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for  
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism  
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the  
library already present on the user's computer  
system, rather than copying library functions  
into the executable, and (2) will operate pro-  
perly with a modified version of the library, if  
the user installs one, as long as the modified  
version is interface-compatible with the version  
that the work was made with.  
c) Accompany the work with a written offer,  
valid for at least three years, to give the same  
user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,  
above, for a charge no more than the cost of  
performing this distribution.  
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such  
executables.  
When a "work that uses the Library" uses mate-  
rial from a header file that is part of the Library,  
the object code for the work may be a derivative  
work of the Library even though the source  
code is not.  
Whether this is true is especially significant if  
the work can be linked without the Library, or if  
the work is itself a library. The threshold for this  
to be true is not precisely defined by law.  
If such an object file uses only numerical para-  
meters, data structure layouts and accessors,  
and small macros and small inline functions  
(ten lines or less in length), then the use of the  
object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether  
it is legally a derivative work. (Executables con-  
taining this object code plus portions of the  
Library will still fall under Section 6.)  
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering  
access to copy from a designated place, offer  
equivalent access to copy the above specified  
materials from the same place.  
e) Verify that the user has already received a  
copy of these materials or that you have already  
sent this user a copy.  
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the  
Library, you may distribute the object code for  
the work under the terms of Section 6.  
For an executable, the required form of the  
"work that uses the Library" must include any  
data and utility programs needed for reprodu-  
cing the executable from it. However, as a spe-  
cial exception, the materials to be distributed  
need not include anything that is normally dis-  
tributed (in either source or binary form) with  
the major components (compiler, kernel, and  
so on) of the operating system on which the  
executable runs, unless that component itself  
accompanies the executable.  
It may happen that this requirement contradicts  
the license restrictions of other proprietary  
libraries that do not normally accompany the  
operating system. Such a contradiction means  
you cannot use both them and the Library toge-  
ther in an executable that you distribute.  
7. You may place library facilities that are a  
work based on the Library side-by-side in a sin-  
gle library together with other library facilities  
not covered by this License, and distribute such  
a combined library, provided that the separate  
Any executables containing that work also fall  
under Section 6, whether or not they are linked  
directly with the Library itself.  
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you  
may also combine or link a "work that uses the  
Library" with the Library to produce a work con-  
taining portions of the Library, and distribute  
that work under terms of your choice, provided  
that the terms permit modification of the work  
for the customer's own use and reverse engi-  
neering for debugging such modifications.  
You must give prominent notice with each copy  
of the work that the Library is used in it and that  
the Library and its use are covered by this  
License. You must supply a copy of this License.  
If the work during execution displays copyright  
notices, you must include the copyright notice  
for the Library among them, as well as a refe-  
rence directing the user to the copy of this  
License. Also, you must do one of these things:  
a) Accompany the work with the complete cor-  
responding machine-readable source code for  
107  
Appendix  
distribution of the work based on the Library  
and of the other library facilities is otherwise  
permitted, and provided that you do these two  
things:  
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy  
of the same work based on the Library, uncom-  
bined with any other library facilities. This must  
be distributed under the terms of the Sections  
above.  
b) Give prominent notice with the combined  
library of the fact that part of it is a work based  
on the Library, and explaining where to find the  
accompanying uncombined form of the same  
work.  
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link  
with, or distribute the Library except as  
expressly provided under this License. Any  
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense,  
link with, or distribute the Library is void, and  
will automatically terminate your rights under  
this License. However, parties who have recei-  
ved copies, or rights, from you under this  
License will not have their licenses terminated  
so long as such parties remain in full compli-  
ance.  
all. For example, if a patent license would not  
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library  
by all those who receive copies directly or indi-  
rectly through you, then the only way you could  
satisfy both it and this License would be to  
refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.  
If any portion of this section is held invalid or  
unenforceable under any particular circum-  
stance, the balance of the section is intended to  
apply, and the section as a whole is intended to  
apply in other circumstances.  
It is not the purpose of this section to induce  
you to infringe any patents or other property  
right claims or to contest validity of any such  
claims; this section has the sole purpose of pro-  
tecting the integrity of the free software distri-  
bution system which is implemented by public  
license practices. Many people have made  
generous contributions to the wide range of  
software distributed through that system in  
reliance on consistent application of that sys-  
tem; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he  
or she is willing to distribute software through  
any other system and a licensee cannot impose  
that choice.  
This section is intended to make thoroughly  
clear what is believed to be a consequence of  
the rest of this License.  
9. You are not required to accept this License,  
since you have not signed it. However, nothing  
else grants you permission to modify or distri-  
bute the Library or its derivative works. These  
actions are prohibited by law if you do not  
accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or  
distributing the Library (or any work based on  
the Library), you indicate your acceptance of  
this License to do so, and all its terms and con-  
ditions for copying, distributing or modifying  
the Library or works based on it.  
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or  
any work based on the Library), the recipient  
automatically receives a license from the origi-  
nal licensor to copy, distribute, link with or  
modify the Library subject to these terms and  
conditions. You may not impose any further  
restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the  
rights granted herein.  
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library  
is restricted in certain countries either by  
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the origi-  
nal copyright holder who places the Library  
under this License may add an explicit geogra-  
phical distribution limitation excluding those  
countries, so that distribution is permitted only  
in or among countries not thus excluded. In  
such case, this License incorporates the limita-  
tion as if written in the body of this License.  
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish  
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser Gene-  
ral Public License from time to time. Such new  
versions will be similar in spirit to the present  
version, but may differ in detail to address new  
problems or concerns.  
You are not responsible for enforcing compli-  
ance by third parties with this License.  
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or  
allegation of patent infringement or for any  
other reason (not limited to patent issues), con-  
ditions are imposed on you (whether by court  
order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict  
the conditions of this License, they do not  
excuse you from the conditions of this License.  
If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simulta-  
neously your obligations under this License and  
any other pertinent obligations, then as a con-  
sequence you may not distribute the Library at  
Each version is given a distinguishing version  
number. If the Library specifies a version num-  
ber of this License which applies to it and "any  
later version", you have the option of following  
the terms and conditions either of that version  
or of any later version published by the Free  
Software Foundation. If the Library does not  
specify a license version number, you may  
choose any version ever published by the Free  
Software Foundation.  
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the  
Library into other free programs whose distri-  
bution conditions are incompatible with these,  
108  
Appendix  
How to Apply These Terms to Your New  
write to the author to ask for permission. For  
software which is copyrighted by the Free Soft-  
ware Foundation, write to the Free Software  
Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions  
for this. Our decision will be guided by the two  
goals of preserving the free status of all deriva-  
tives of our free software and of promoting the  
sharing and reuse of software generally.  
NO WARRANTY  
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF  
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE  
LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLI-  
CABLE LAW.  
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING  
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PAR-  
TIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED  
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABI-  
LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PER-  
FORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU.  
SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU  
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVI-  
CING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.  
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLI-  
CABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL  
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER  
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRI-  
BUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE  
LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY  
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE  
OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING  
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA  
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUS-  
TAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE  
OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER  
SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER  
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  
OF SUCH DAMAGES.  
Libraries  
If you develop a new library, and you want it to  
be of the greatest possible use to the public, we  
recommend making it free software that every-  
one can redistribute and change. You can do so  
by permitting redistribution under these terms  
(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordi-  
nary General Public License).  
To apply these terms, attach the following  
notices to the library. It is safest to attach them  
to the start of each source file to most effec-  
tively convey the exclusion of warranty; and  
each file should have at least the "copyright"  
line and a pointer to where the full notice is  
found.  
<one line to give the library's name and a brief  
idea of what it does.>  
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>  
This library is free software; you can redistri-  
bute it and/or modify it under the terms of the  
GNU Lesser General Public License as publis-  
hed by the Free Software Foundation; either  
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)  
any later version.  
This library is distributed in the hope that it will  
be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; wit-  
hout even the implied warranty of MERCHAN-  
TABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-  
POSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public  
License for more details.  
You should have received a copy of the GNU  
Lesser General Public License along with this  
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foun-  
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos-  
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA  
Also add information on how to contact you by  
electronic and paper mail.  
You should also get your employer (if you work  
as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign  
a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if neces-  
sary. Here is a sample; alter the names:  
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS  
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright  
interest in the library `Frob' (a library for twea-  
king knobs) written by James Random Hacker.  
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon,  
President of Vice  
109  
Accessories  
Accessories  
Gigaset Handsets  
Upgrade your Gigaset to a cordless PABX:  
Gigaset Handset S45  
u Illuminated colour display (4096 colours)  
u Illuminated keypad  
u Handsfree talking  
u Polyphonic ringer tones  
u Directory for around 150 entries  
u SMS (Precondition: CLIP must be enabled)  
u Headset socket  
u Room monitor  
Gigaset Handset C45  
u Illuminated colour display (4096 colours)  
u Various different screensavers  
u Illuminated keypad  
u Handsfree talking  
u Polyphonic ringer tones  
u Directory for around 100 entries  
u SMS (Precondition: CLIP must be enabled)  
u Alarm clock  
u Headset socket  
All accessories and batteries are available from your phone retailer.  
Only use original accessories. This will avoid possible health risks and  
damage to property, and also ensure that all the relevant regulations are  
complied with.  
110  
   
Glossary  
C
Glossary  
Call forwarding  
CF  
A
Automatic forwarding of a call to a dif-  
ferent telephone number. There are  
three kinds of call forwarding:  
ADSL  
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line  
Special form of DSL.  
– CFU, Call Forwarding Unconditional  
– CFB, Call Forwarding Busy  
ALG  
Application Layer Gateway  
– CFNR, Call Forwarding No Reply  
NAT control mechanism of a router.  
Call waiting  
CW  
Many routers with integrated NAT use  
ALG. ALG lets the data packets in a VoIP  
connection pass and adds the public IP  
address of the secure private network.  
VoIP provider feature. A beep during a  
call indicates that another caller is wait-  
ing. You can accept or reject the second  
call. You can activate/deactivate the  
feature.  
The router's ALG should be deactivated  
Chatting  
Form of communication on the Inter-  
See also: Firewall, NAT, Outbound  
proxy, STUN.  
net. During a chat, brief messages are  
exchanged between the communicat-  
ing parties in real time. Chatting in this  
sense is understood to be a written  
form of communication.  
Authentication  
Restriction of access to a network/serv-  
Automatic ringback  
See Ringback when the number is  
busy.  
Client  
Application that requests a service  
from a server.  
B
Codec  
Block dialling  
Coder/decoder  
Enter the complete phone number, and  
correct it if necessary. Then pick up the  
receiver or press the handsfree key to  
Codec is a procedure that digitises and  
compresses analogue voice before it is  
sent via the Internet and decodes –  
i.e.translates into analogue voice –  
digital data when voice packets are  
received. There are different codecs  
that vary, for instance, according to the  
level of compression.  
Broadband Internet access  
See DSL.  
Buddy  
Subscriber with whom you exchange  
time (chatting).  
Both parties involved in the telephone  
connection (caller/sender and recipi-  
ent) must use the same codec. This is  
negotiated between the sender and the  
recipient when establishing a connec-  
tion.  
See also: Instant messaging.  
The choice of codec is a compromise  
between voice quality, transmission  
speed and the necessary bandwidth.  
A high level of compression, for exam-  
ple, means that the bandwidth  
111  
                                     
Glossary  
required for each voice connection is  
DMZ (Demilitarised Zone)  
low. However, it also means that the  
time needed to compress/decompress  
the data is greater, which increases  
execution time for data in the network  
and thus impairs voice quality. The time  
required increases the delay between  
the sender speaking and the recipient  
hearing what has been said.  
DMZ describes a part of a network that  
is outside the firewall.  
A DMZ is set up, as it were, between  
a network you want to protect (e.g. a  
LAN) and a non-secure network  
(e.g. the Internet). A DMZ permits  
unrestricted access from the Internet to  
only one or a few network compo-  
nents, while the other network compo-  
nents remain secure behind the fire-  
wall.  
Consultation call  
You are making a call. With a consulta-  
tion call, you interrupt the conversation  
briefly to establish a connection to  
another participant. If you terminate  
the connection to this participant  
immediately, then this was an enquiry  
call. If you switch to and fro between  
the first and second participants, it is  
called Toggling.  
DNS  
Hierarchical system that permits the  
assignment of IP addresses to Domain  
names that are easier to note. This  
assignment has to be managed by a  
local DNS server in each (W)LAN. The  
local DNS server determines the IP  
address, if necessary by enquiring of  
superordinate DNS servers and other  
local DNS servers in the Internet.  
D
DHCP  
Internet protocol which handles the  
automatic assignment of IP addresses  
to Network subscribers. The protocol  
is made available in the network by a  
server. A DHCP server can e.g. be a  
router.  
You can specify the IP address of the  
primary/secondary DNS server.  
See also: DynDNS.  
Domain name  
Name of one (of several) Web server on  
the Internet (e.g. Siemens Home) The  
domain name is assigned to the rele-  
vant IP address by DNS.  
The phone contains a DHCP client. A  
router that contains a DHCP server can  
assign the IP addresses for the phone  
automatically from a defined address  
block. This dynamic assignment means  
that several Network subscribers can  
share one IP address, although they use  
it alternately and not simultaneously.  
DSCP  
Differentiated Service Code Point  
See Quality of Service (QoS).  
DSL  
Digital Subscriber Line  
Data transfer technology which allows  
Internet access at e.g. 1.5 Mbps over  
conventional phone lines. Require-  
ments: DSL modem and the appropri-  
ate service offered by the Internet pro-  
vider.  
With some routers you can specify that  
the IP address for the phone is never  
changed.  
Displayed name  
VoIP provider feature. You can specify  
any name that is to be shown to the  
other party call instead of your phone  
number.  
DSLAM  
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer  
The DSLAM is a switch cabinet in an  
exchange at which all subscriber con-  
nectors converge.  
112  
                                     
Glossary  
DTMF  
F
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency  
Another description for dual tone  
multi-frequency dialling (DTMF).  
Firewall  
You can use a firewall to protect your  
network against unauthorised external  
access. This involves combining various  
measures and technologies (hard and/  
or software) to control the flow of data  
between a private network you wish to  
protect and an unprotected network  
(e.g. the Internet).  
A dynamic IP address is assigned to a  
network component automatically via  
DHCP. The dynamic IP address for a  
network component can change every  
time it registers or at certain time inter-  
vals.  
See also: NAT.  
See also: Static IP address  
Firmware  
DynDNS  
Device software in which basic infor-  
mation is saved for the functioning of a  
device. A new version of the firmware  
can be loaded into the device's memory  
(firmware update) to correct errors or  
update the device software.  
Domain names and IP addresses are  
realised via DNS. For Dynamic IP  
addresses this service is now  
(DynDNS). This permits the use of a  
network component with a changing  
IP address as a Server on the Internet.  
DynDNS ensures that a service can  
always be addressed on the Internet  
under the same Domain name irre-  
spective of the current IP address.  
Flat rate  
System of billing for an Internet con-  
nection. The Internet provider charges  
a set monthly fee. There are no addi-  
tional charges for the duration of the  
connection or number of connections.  
Fragmentation  
E
ECT  
Data packets that are too big are split  
into smaller packets (fragments) before  
they are transferred. They are put  
together again when they reach the  
recipient (defragmented).  
Explicit Call Transfer  
Participant A calls Participant B. He puts  
the connection on hold and calls Partic-  
ipant C. Rather than connect everyone  
in a three-party conference, A now  
transfers Participant B to C and hangs  
up.  
Full duplex  
Data transmission mode in which data  
can be sent and received at the same  
time.  
EEPROM  
Electrically Eraseable Programmable Read Only  
Memory  
Your phone's storage chip with fixed  
data (e.g.user-specific device settings  
made at the factory) and automatically  
saved data (e.g.c alls list entries).  
Ethernet network  
Wired LAN.  
113  
                                   
Glossary  
are now more frequently supported  
than in the past.  
G
G.711 a law, G.711 µ law  
Standard for a Codec.  
H
G.711 delivers a very good voice qual-  
ity that corresponds to that in the ISDN  
fixed network. As there is little com-  
pression, the necessary bandwidth is  
around 64 Kbit/s per voice connection,  
but the delay caused by coding/decod-  
ing is only 0.125 ms.  
Headset  
Combination of microphone and head-  
phone. A headset makes handsfree  
talking more comfortable. There are  
headsets available which are con-  
nected to the handset by a cable.  
HTTP Proxy  
"a law" describes the European stand-  
ard and "µ law" describes the North  
American/Japanese equivalent.  
Sever via which the Network subscrib-  
ers can process their Internet traffic.  
Hub  
G.726  
Uses one Infrastructure network to  
connect several Network subscribers.  
All data sent to the hub by one network  
subscriber is forwarded to all network  
subscribers.  
Standard for a Codec.  
G.726 delivers a good voice quality. It is  
inferior to the quality with codec G.711  
but better than with G.729.  
G.729A/B  
See also: Gateway, Router.  
Standard for a Codec.  
I
The voice quality is rather less with  
G.729A/B. As a result of the high level  
of compression, the necessary band-  
width is only around 8 Kbit/s per voice  
connection, but the delay is around  
15 ms.  
IEEE  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
International body that defines stand-  
ards in electronics and electrotechnol-  
ogy, concerned in particular with the  
standardisation of LAN technology,  
transmission protocols, data transfer  
rate and wiring.  
Gateway  
Connects two different Networks,  
e.g. a router as an Internet gateway.  
Infrastructure network  
For phone calls from VoIP to the tele-  
phone network, a gateway has to be  
connected to the IP network and the  
telephone network (gateway/VoIP pro-  
vider). It forwards calls from VoIP to the  
telephone network as required.  
Network with central structure: all  
Network subscribers communicate  
via a central Router.  
Instant messaging  
(German: immediate exchange of messages)  
Service that uses a client program to  
allow chatting in real time, i.e. to send  
brief messages to other subscribers on  
the Internet.  
Gateway Provider  
See SIP provider.  
Global IP Address  
See IP address.  
GSM  
Global System for Mobile Communication  
Originally, European standard for  
mobile networks. GSM can now be  
described as a worldwide standard. In  
the USA and Japan national standards  
114  
                                 
Glossary  
Internet  
Global WAN. A series of protocols have  
IP pool range  
Range of IP addresses that the DHCP  
server can use to assign dynamic IP  
addresses.  
Every Network subscribers is identifi-  
able via its IP address. DNS assigns a  
Domain name to the IP address.  
Important services on the Internet  
include the World Wide Web (WWW),  
e-mail, file transfer and discussion  
forums.  
L
LAN  
Local Area Network  
Network with a restricted physical  
range. A LAN can be wireless (WLAN)  
and/or wired.  
Local IP Address  
Internet Service Provider  
The local or private IP address is the  
address for a network component in  
the local network (LAN). The network  
operator can assign any address he or  
she wants. Devices that act as a link  
from a local network to the Internet  
(gateway or router) have a public and a  
private IP address.  
Enables access to the Internet for a fee.  
TCP/IP protocol on the Internet. IP is  
responsible for addressing parties in a  
Network using IP addresses and  
routes data from the sender to the  
recipient. IP determines the paths  
(routing) along which the data packets  
travel.  
See also IP address.  
Local SIP Port  
IP address  
See SIP port/Local SIP port.  
A unique address for a network compo-  
nent within a network on the basis of  
the TCP/IP protocols (e.g. LAN, Inter-  
net). On the Internet, domain names  
are usually assigned instead of IP  
addresses. DNS assigns the corre-  
sponding IP address to the domain  
name.  
M
MAC address  
Media Access Control Address  
Hardware address by means of which  
each network device (e.g. network  
card, switch, phone) can be uniquely  
identified worldwide. It is composed of  
six parts (hexadecimal numbers), sepa-  
rated by a "-" (e.g. 00-90-65-44-00-3A).  
The IP address has four parts (decimal  
numbers between 0 and 255) sepa-  
rated by full stops (e.g. 230.94.233.2).  
The MAC address is assigned by the  
manufacturer and cannot be changed.  
The IP address is made up of the net-  
work number and the number of the  
Network subscribers (e.g. phone).  
Depending on the Subnet mask the  
front one, two or three parts make up  
the network number and the rest of the  
IP address addresses the network com-  
ponent. The network number of all the  
components in any one network must  
be identical.  
Mbps  
Million bits per second  
Unit of the transmission speed in a  
network.  
MRU  
Maximum Receive Unit  
Defines the maximum user data vol-  
ume within a data packet.  
MTU  
IP addresses can be assigned automati-  
cally with DHCP (dynamic IP addresses)  
or manually (static IP addresses).  
Maximum Transmission Unit  
Defines the maximum length of a data  
packet that can be carried over the net-  
work at a time.  
See also: DHCP.  
115  
                                             
Glossary  
Music on hold  
O
Music that is played while you are  
Consultation call or Toggling. The  
waiting participant hears music while  
on hold.  
Outbound proxy  
Alternative NAT control mechanism to  
STUN and ALG.  
Outbound proxies are implemented by  
the VoIP provider in Firewall/NAT envi-  
ronments as an alternative to SIP proxy  
server. They control data traffic  
through the firewall.  
N
NAT  
Network Address Translation  
Method for converting (private)  
IP addresses to one or more (public)  
IP addresses. NAT enables the  
(e.g. VoIP telephones) in a LAN to be  
concealed behind a shared IP address  
for the Router on the Internet.  
Outbound proxy and STUN servers  
should not be used simultaneously.  
See also: STUN and NAT.  
P
PIN  
Personal Identification Number  
Protects against unauthorised use.  
When the PIN is activated a number  
combination has to be entered in order  
to access a protected area.  
VoIP telephones behind a NAT router  
cannot be reached by VoIP servers (on  
account of the private IP address). In  
order to "get around" NAT, it is possible  
to use (alternatively) ALG in the router,  
STUN in the VoIP telephone, or for the  
VoIP provider to use an Outbound  
proxy.  
You can protect your base station  
configuration data with a system PIN  
(4-digit number combination).  
If an outbound proxy is made available  
you must allow for this in the VoIP set-  
tings for your phone.  
Port  
Data is exchanged between two appli-  
cations in a Network via a port.  
Network  
Group of devices. Devices can be con-  
nected in either wired or wireless  
mode.  
The Internet gateway (e.g. your router)  
forwards data packets from the Inter-  
net that are directed to a certain Port to  
the port concerned. This allows servers  
in the LAN to offer services on the  
Internet without you needing a public  
IP address.  
Networks can also differ in range and  
structure:  
– Range: local networks (LAN) or  
wide-area networks (WAN)  
Port number  
– Structure: Infrastructure network  
Indicates a specific application of a  
Network subscribers. Depending on  
the setting in the LAN, the port  
number is permanently assigned or  
else it is newly assigned with each  
access.  
or ad-hoc network  
Network subscribers  
Devices and computers that are con-  
nected to each other in a network, e.g.  
servers, PCs and phones.  
The combination of IP address/Port  
number uniquely identifies the recipi-  
ent or sender of a data packet within a  
network.  
116  
                             
Glossary  
Pre-dialling  
R
RAM  
Private IP Address  
Random Access Memory  
See Public IP address.  
Memory in which you have reading and  
storage rights. Items such as melodies  
and screen pictures are saved in the  
RAM after being loaded onto the phone  
via the Web configurator.  
Protocol  
Describes the agreements for commu-  
nicating within a Network. It contains  
rules for opening, administering and  
closing a connection, about data for-  
mats, time frames and possible error  
handling.  
Registrar  
The registrar manages the Network  
subscribers's current IP addresses.  
When you register with your VoIP pro-  
vider, your current IP address is saved  
on the registrar. This means you can  
also be reached when on the move.  
Computer program that controls the  
exchange of data between Client and  
Server in computer networks. If the  
phone sends a query to the VoIP server,  
phone and as a client towards the  
server. A proxy is addressed via  
IP address/Domain namen and Port.  
Ringback when the call is not answered  
= CCNR (Completion of Calls on No  
Reply). If a participant does not  
respond when called, a caller can  
arrange an automatic ringback. As  
soon as the destination phone has  
completed a call and is free again the  
caller is rung back. This feature must be  
supported by the exchange. The ring-  
back request is automatically cancelled  
after about 2 hours (depending on the  
VoIP provider).  
Public IP address  
The public IP address is the address for  
a network component on the Internet.  
It is assigned by the Internet Service  
Provider. Devices that act as a link from  
a local network to the Internet (gate-  
address.  
Ringback when the number is busy  
See also: IP address, NAT  
= CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy  
Subscriber). If a caller hears the busy  
tone, he or she can activate the ring-  
back function. As soon as the connec-  
tion is free the caller is rung back. As  
soon as the caller lifts his receiver the  
connection is made automatically.  
Q
Quality of Service (QoS)  
Describes the Quality of Service in com-  
munication networks. Differentiations  
are made between various Quality of  
Service classes.  
ROM  
Read Only Memory  
QoS influences the flow of data packets  
on the Internet e.g. by prioritising data  
packets, bandwidth reservation and  
packet optimisation.  
A type of memory that can only be  
read, as opposed to RAM which can be  
both read and written.  
In VoIP networks, QoS influences the  
voice quality. If the whole infrastruc-  
ture (router, network server etc.) has  
QoS, the voice quality is better, i.e.  
fewer delays, less echoing, less crack-  
ling.  
Router  
Routes data packets within a network  
and between different networks via the  
quickest route. Can connect Ethernet  
networks and WLAN. Can be a  
Gateway to the Internet.  
117  
                                         
Glossary  
Routing  
SIP provider  
See VoIP provider.  
Routing is the transmission of data  
packets to another subscriber in your  
network. On its way to the recipient,  
the data packet is sent from one router  
to the next until it reaches its destina-  
tion.  
SIP proxy server  
IP address of your VoIP provider's gate-  
way server.  
Static IP address  
A static IP address is assigned to a net-  
work component manually during net-  
work configuration. Unlike a Dynamic  
IP address, a static (fixed) IP address  
never changes.  
If data packets were not forwarded in  
this way, a network like the Internet  
would not be possible. Routing con-  
nects the individual networks to this  
global system.  
STUN  
A router is a part of this system; it trans-  
mits data packets both within a local  
network and from one network to the  
next. Transmission of data from one  
network to another is performed on the  
basis of a common protocol.  
Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT  
NAT control mechanism.  
STUN is a data protocol for VoIP tele-  
phones. STUN replaces the private IP  
address in the data packets of the VoIP  
telephone with the public address of  
the secure private network. To control  
data transfer, a STUN server is also  
required on the Internet. STUN cannot  
be implemented with symmetric NATs.  
RTP  
Realtime Transport Protocol  
Global standard for transferring audio  
and video data. Often used in conjunc-  
tion with UDP. In this case, RTP packets  
are embedded in UDP packets.  
See also: ALG, Firewall, NAT,  
Outbound proxy.  
RTP port  
Subnet  
(Local) Port which is used to send and  
receive voice data packets for VoIP.  
Segment of a Network.  
Subnet mask  
S
number and a variable subscriber  
number. The network number is identi-  
cal for all Network subscribers. The  
proportion of the IP address made up of  
the network number is determined in  
the subnet mask. For the subnet mask  
255.255.255.0, for example, the first  
three parts of the IP address are the net-  
work number and the last part is the  
subscriber number.  
Server  
Provides a service to other Network  
indicate a computer/PC or an applica-  
tion. A server is addressed via  
IP address/Domain name and Port.  
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol)  
Signalling protocol independent of  
voice communication. Used for estab-  
lishing and ending a call. It is also pos-  
sible to define parameters for voice  
transmission.  
Symmetric NAT  
A symmetric NAT assigns different  
external IP addresses and port numbers  
to the same internal IP addresses and  
port numbers – depending on the  
external target address.  
SIP address  
See URI.  
SIP port/Local SIP port  
(Local) Port which is used to send and  
receive SIP signalling data for VoIP.  
118  
                                             
Glossary  
URIs can be entered in the phone as a  
number. By dialling a URI you can call  
an Internet subscriber with VoIP equip-  
ment.  
T
TCP  
Transmission Control Protocol  
Transport protocol. Session-based  
transmission protocol: it sets up, moni-  
tors and terminates a connection  
between sender and recipient for trans-  
porting data.  
URL  
Universal Resource Locator  
Globally unique address of a Domain  
on the Internet.  
A URL is a subtype of URI. URLs identify  
a resource by its location in the Inter-  
net. For historical reasons the term is  
TLS  
Transport Layer Security  
Protocol for encrypting data transmis-  
sions on the Internet. TLS is a superor-  
dinated Transport protocol.  
User ID  
See User identification.  
Toggling  
Toggling allows you to switch between  
two callers or between a conference  
call and an individual caller without  
allowing the waiting caller to listen in.  
User identification  
Name/number combination for access  
e.g. to your VoIP account.  
V
Transmission rate  
Voice codec  
Speed at which data is transmitted in  
the WAN or LAN. The transmission rate  
is measured in data units per unit of  
time (Mbit/s).  
See Codec.  
VoIP  
Voice over Internet Protocol  
Telephone calls are no longer placed  
and transmitted over the telephone  
network but over the Internet (or other  
IP networks).  
Transport protocol  
Controls data transport between com-  
munication partners (applications).  
See also: UDP, TCP, TLS.  
VoIP provider  
U
A VoIP, SIP or Gateway Provider is an  
Internet service provider that provides  
a Gateway for Internet telephony. As  
the phone works with the SIP standard,  
your provider must support the SIP  
standard.  
UDP  
User Datagram Protocol  
Transport protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP is  
a non session-based protocol. It does  
not establish a fixed connection. The  
data packets (datagrams) are sent as  
broadcast. The recipient is solely  
responsible for making sure the data is  
received. The sender is not notified  
about whether it is received.  
The provider routes calls from VoIP to  
the telephone network (analogue,  
ISDN and mobile radio) and vice versa.  
W
WAN  
Wide Area Network  
URI  
Uniform Resource Identifier  
Character string used to identify  
resources (e.g. e-mail recipient,  
http://siemens.com, files).  
Wide-area network that is unrestricted  
in terms of area (e.g. Internet).  
On the Internet URIs are used as a uni-  
form identification for resources. URIs  
are also described as an SIP address.  
119  
                                                           
Index  
B
Index  
Base selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Base station  
A
changing system PIN . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
checking service information . . . . . 99  
connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
connecting with fixed network . . . . 11  
connecting with mains power  
Access protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Access to Web configurator  
from other networks . . . . . . . . . .76  
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110  
Account name (e-mail). . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
Activating  
advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Annex B for G729 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 23  
handsfree talking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
room monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Activating/deactivating repeater  
supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
connecting with router. . . . . . . . . . 11  
operating on PABX. . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . 100  
restoring to factory settings . . . . . . 66  
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
setting default connection . . . . . . . 67  
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
updating firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Battery  
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Address assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
ADSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Advisory tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Alert tone  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . .64  
ALG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 9  
fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Beep, see Advisory tones  
Best base station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Birthday, see Anniversary  
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Answer machine,  
Block dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Broadband Internet access. . . . . . . . 111  
Buddy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 111  
calling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
checking information. . . . . . . . . . . 52  
status changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Buddy list (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Busy (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Buttons (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . 75  
see Network mailbox  
Application Layer Gateway (ALG) . . .111  
Area code, dial automatically . . . . . . .87  
Assigning sending number  
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . .85  
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line . .111  
Attaching the belt clip . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Authentication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . .62  
Auto-answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Automatic area code  
accepting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
disconnecting (toggling) . . . . . . . . 28  
ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
external. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
number/name display . . . . . . . . . . 21  
rejecting external. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
transferring (connect) . . . . . . . . . . 58  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . .87  
Automatic versions check. . . . . . . . . .93  
Available codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Away from computer (messenger) . . .50  
120  
 
Index  
Call display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Call diversion  
Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Conference call  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Configuration  
VoIP (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Call duration display. . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Call forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
VoIP (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . .79  
Call waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
accepting/rejecting (VoIP) . . . . . . . .29  
activating/deactivating (VoIP) . . . . .28  
internal call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Call-by-call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Call-by-call numbers. . . . . . . . . . .30, 35  
Calling  
via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Configuring  
VoIP connection (handset) . . . . . . . 69  
VoIP connection  
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . 77  
Configuring the Network mailbox . . . 55  
Confirmation tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Connecting PC with  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Connecting the charging cradle . . . . . . 8  
Connecting to the Web configurator . 72  
Connection  
entering IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
external . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Gigaset.net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27  
via VoIP/fixed network. . . . . . . . . . .20  
Calling Line Identification. . . . . . . . . .21  
Calling Line Identification  
activating (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Internet (troubleshooting) . . . . . . . 14  
name (Web configurator) . . . . . . . . 77  
Connection assistant  
starting (getting started) . . . . . . . . 12  
Connection name  
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Calling Name Identification  
Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Calls list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Cancelling  
fixed network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Connection socket for headset. . . . 1, 15  
Connection to messenger server . . . . 49  
Connection type  
dialling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 25  
Cancelling operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Care of the telephone . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Changing internal number . . . . . . . . .57  
Changing the system PIN . . . . . . . . . .65  
Character set table, see  
selecting (display key) . . . . . . . . . . 20  
selecting (talk key). . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Consultation call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Correcting incorrect entries . . . . . . . . 25  
Customer Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Special characters  
Charge status display (battery) . . . . .1, 9  
Charging time of handset. . . . . . . . .100  
Chatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 111  
with buddies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Checking EEPROM version . . . . . . . . .93  
Checking service information . . . . . . .99  
CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
CLIP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
CNIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Codec  
Data packets, fragmentation . . . . . . 113  
Data server for firmware update . . . . 92  
Deactivating  
advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
auto answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 23  
handsfree talking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Default settings  
handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Defining dialling plans. . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Delete directory (Web configurator) . . 89  
Delete key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
available codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Codecs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Colour scheme (display) . . . . . . . . . . .61  
121  
Index  
Deleting characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Demilitarised Zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
De-registering  
with Web configurator . . . . . . . . . .73  
Deregistering  
Disposal  
electrical and electronic devices . . . . 5  
DMZ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
DNS server  
handset from base station. . . . . . . .57  
Destination number (room monitor). .60  
DHCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 113  
Dialling  
cancelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
with speed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Differentiated Service Code Point . . .112  
Digital Subscriber Line . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Digital Subscriber Line  
alternative (Web configurator) . . . . 76  
preferred (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
preferred (Web configurator) . . . . . 76  
Do not disturb (messenger) . . . . . . . . 50  
Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Domain name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Domain Name System. . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Draft message list (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . 38  
DSCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
DSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
DSLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
DTMF (tone dialling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
DTMF-reminder for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Dynamic DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Dynamic Host Configuration  
Access Multiplexer. . . . . . . . . . .112  
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
copying number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
editing via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
file format on PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Gigaset.net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
loading from PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 24  
order of entries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
saving an anniversary . . . . . . . . . . .32  
saving entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
saving numbers from SMS text . . . .40  
selecting entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
sending entry/list to handset . . . . . .31  
store sender's SMS number . . . . . . .40  
transferring to/from PC . . . . . . . . . .88  
using to enter numbers. . . . . . . . . .32  
Display  
backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
call duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
caller's number (CLI/CLIP) . . . . . . . .21  
changing display language . . . . . . .61  
colour scheme/contrast. . . . . . . . . .61  
in idle status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
name (CNIP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
network mailbox message. . . . . . . .55  
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
setting the screen picture . . . . . . . .61  
wrong language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Display keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 24  
Displayed name (VoIP) . . . . . . . . 79, 112  
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
Dynamic IP Address. . . . . . . . . . 75, 113  
DynDNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Earpiece mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Earpiece volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
EATONI (predictive text) . . . . . . . . . 102  
E-mail  
account name . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
entering access data . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
incoming e-mail server. . . . . . . 45, 91  
messages whilst making a  
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
registration name/password . . . 45, 91  
settings (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
settings (Web configurator) . . . . . . 91  
viewing the message header . . . . . 47  
viewing the sender's address . . . . . 47  
E-mail address, SMS to . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
E-mail list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Emergency number  
dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
when keypad lock is active . . . . . . . . 5  
Emergency numbers  
always dialled via fixed network . . . 88  
entering own. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
End call key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 20, 21  
Ending, call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
122  
Index  
Enquiry call  
Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Gateway Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Gigaset.net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
calling subscriber. . . . . . . . . . . 26, 27  
changing/deleting own name. . . . . 27  
directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
entering name. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 27  
searching for subscriber . . . . . . . . . 25  
Gigaset.net directory  
ending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
external (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24, 58  
Enter flash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Enter pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Entering access data (e-mail) . . . . 45, 91  
Error handling  
messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Error tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Ethernet network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Example  
specifying/editing own name . . . . . 27  
Global IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Global System for  
entering directory into tsv file . . . . .89  
menu input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
multiple line input . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Explicit Call Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
External enquiry call  
Mobile Communication. . . . . . . 114  
GNU Lesser General Public Licence. . 103  
Going online (messenger) . . . . . . . . . 49  
Group call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
GSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
F
Handset  
Factory settings  
activating/deactivating. . . . . . . . 1, 23  
activating/deactivating advisory  
base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Fast access  
tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
assigning receiving number . . . . . . 85  
assigning sending number . . . . . . . 85  
base station selection. . . . . . . . . . . 57  
changing internal names . . . . . . . . 58  
changing internal number . . . . . . . 57  
changing name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
changing to a different base  
station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
changing to best reception. . . . . . . 57  
checking service information . . . . . 99  
contact with liquid. . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
deregistering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
display backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
display language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
idle status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
locating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
loudspeaker volume. . . . . . . . . 24, 63  
muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
operating and charging times. . . . 100  
registering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9, 56  
restoring to factory settings . . . . . . 65  
setting (individual). . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
setting/changing the screen  
directory entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
network mailbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Firewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
automatic update . . . . . . . . . . .67, 93  
checking version. . . . . . . . . . . . 93, 99  
defining server for update. . . . . . . .92  
starting update (handset) . . . . . . . .67  
starting update  
(Web configurator). . . . . . . . . .93  
update from Internet . . . . . . . . . . .92  
update from local PC. . . . . . . . . . . .92  
Fixed network  
connection name . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Fixed network connection  
name (Web configurator) . . . . . . . .77  
Flat rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Format directory file on PC . . . . . . . . .89  
Fragmentation of data packets . . . . .113  
Free software, licences. . . . . . . . . . .103  
Full duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
G
G711 µ law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
G711 a law . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
G726. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
G729. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
123  
Index  
transferring a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
using room monitor . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
using several . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Handset directory  
editing via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Handset operating time  
in room monitor mode . . . . . . . . . .60  
Handset reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Handsfree  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . .22  
key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Handsfree talking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Hash key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 23  
Headset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 15, 114  
Hearing aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Hold music . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 66, 116  
HTTP Proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Hub. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
no connection to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Internet access (broadband) . . . . . . 111  
Internet Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Internet Service Provider . . . . . . . . . 115  
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
assigning (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
assigning (Web configurator) . . . . . 75  
automatically obtaining one. . . 69, 75  
checking (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
checking (Web configurator) . . . . . 93  
dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
private . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
public . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
static. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
IP address type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 75  
IP configuration  
I
Icon  
Web configurator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
IP configuring  
handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
IP pool range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
alarm clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
new messenger message . . . . . . . .52  
new SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
ringer tone deactivated. . . . . . . . . .63  
Idle status  
back to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
IEEE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Incoming e-mail server (e-mail) . . 45, 91  
Incoming message list  
opening (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
Incoming message list (e-mail) . . . . . .46  
Incoming server (e-mail) . . . . . . . . . .45  
Incorrect input (correction). . . . . . . . .25  
Info messages (messenger) . . . . . . . .53  
Infrastructure network . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Input language (message) . . . . . . . .103  
Installation, base station . . . . . . . . . . .9  
Instant messaging . . . . . . . . 48, 90, 114  
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Institute of Electrical and  
Jabber ID (messenger). . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Jabber server (messenger). . . . . . . . . 90  
Jabber server port (messenger) . . . . . 90  
Key 1 (fast access). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Key click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 23  
Keys  
assigning directory entry . . . . . 30, 31  
call-by-call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
cancel key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 23  
delete key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
display keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 24  
end call key . . . . . . . . . . 1, 20, 21, 25  
fast access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
handsfree key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
hash key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 23  
keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
menu key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 33  
on/off key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Electronics Engineers. . . . . . . . .114  
Interface language  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
Internal call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
call waiting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Internal enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . .24, 58  
124  
Index  
paging key (base station) . . . . . . . . .1  
recall key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
speed dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31  
star key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 63  
talk key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Maximum Transmission Unit . . . . . . 115  
Mbps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Media Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Medical appliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Menu  
L
end tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
going back one menu level. . . . 24, 25  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
menu guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
menu input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 24  
phone overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Web configurator overview . . . . . . 19  
Menu bar (Web configurator) . . . . . . 74  
Message  
deleting (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
reading the subject (e-mail) . . . . . . 47  
receiving (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . 52  
receiving (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
writing/sending (messenger) . . . . . 53  
writing/sending (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Message from the network mailbox . . 55  
Message key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
opening lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Message list  
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
messenger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
calling buddy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
changing own status . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
entering access data . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
errors when sending . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
lost connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 54  
message list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
resource name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Messenger message  
LAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
Language  
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
LGPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
Licences, free software. . . . . . . . . . .103  
Linking, see SMS  
Liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
List  
calls list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
e-mail notifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
handsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
last number redial list . . . . . . . . . . .33  
missed calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Load directory onto PC . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
Local Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
Local IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
Local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
Local SIP port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Lock (keypad lock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Login password  
messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Lost connection  
messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 54  
Loudspeaker volume . . . . . . . . . .24, 63  
M
checking (Web configurator) . . . . . .93  
Mailbox ID, see SMS  
Mailboxes, see SMS  
deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
writing/sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Messenger server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
establishing a connection. . . . . . . . 49  
Million bits per second . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Missed calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
MRU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
MTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 24  
Mains adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Making calls  
accepting a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
external (VoIP, fixed network) . . . . .20  
internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Making cost-effective calls . . . . . . . . .35  
Making internal calls . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Maximum Receive Unit. . . . . . . . . . .115  
125  
Index  
Multiple line input . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Muting the handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Muting the microphone . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Opening online directory. . . . . . . . . . 24  
Opening the incoming mail list.. . . . . 46  
Operating time of handset. . . . . . . . 100  
Operation (preparing to use  
the phone). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Order in directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Outbound proxy . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 116  
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
N
Name  
changing name of the handset . . . .58  
displayed (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
displaying caller's name (CNIP) . . . .21  
fixed network connection . . . . . . . .82  
VoIP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
NAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Navigation area  
(Web configurator) . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Network Address Translation . . . . . .116  
Network area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Network mailbox  
assigning key 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
entering number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Network provider (numbers list) . . . . .30  
Network services  
settings for VoIP calls . . . . . . . . . . .28  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Notification  
PABX  
operating base station on PABX . . . 71  
pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
setting dialling mode . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
setting flash time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Pack contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 57  
Pauses (PABX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Personal Identification Number . . . . 116  
Personal provider data. . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Phone  
configuring via PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
setting (Web configurator) . . . . . . . 75  
setting base station (on handset) . . 65  
setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Phone connection  
configuring (Web configurator) . . . 77  
Phone functions, overview . . . . . . . . 16  
Phone jack assignment . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Phone status (Web configurator) . . . . 93  
Phoning, internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
PIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
POP3 server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Port Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Power consumption (base station). . 100  
Power consumption,  
incoming e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
Notification via SMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Number  
as destination for room monitor . . .60  
copying from an SMS text . . . . . . . .40  
copying from directory . . . . . . . . . .32  
copying to directory . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
displaying caller's number (CLIP) . . .21  
entering network mailbox . . . . . . . .55  
entering with directory . . . . . . . . . .32  
saving in the directory. . . . . . . . . . .30  
Number assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Numbers list, network provider. . . . . .30  
O
see Power consumption  
Offline (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50  
On/Off key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Online (messenger) . . . . . . . . . . .48, 50  
Online directory  
Pre-dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Predictive text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Preferred DNS server  
entering (handset). . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
entering (Web configurator). . . . . . 76  
Gigaset.net. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
126  
Index  
Priority (messenger). . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
Private IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . .94  
Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Proxy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Proxy server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Proxy server address. . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
Public IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
changing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
deactivating permanently. . . . . . . . 63  
muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
setting melody. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
setting volume . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 63  
ROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Room monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
connecting base station . . . . . . . . . 11  
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
RTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
RTP mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
RTP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 118  
Q
Quality of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . .94  
R
RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Random Access Memory . . . . . . . . .117  
Read Only Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Reading message (messenger) . . . . . .53  
Ready to chat (messenger) . . . . . . . . .50  
Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Recall key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Receiving number  
assigning (Web configurator) . . . . .85  
display on the handset . . . . . . . . . .21  
Registering  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9, 56  
with the Web configurator . . . . . . .72  
Registrar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Registrar server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Registration name  
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
VoIP account . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 69, 79  
Registration password  
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 91  
VoIP account . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 69, 79  
Registration refresh time . . . . . . . . . .80  
Reminder call (anniversary) . . . . . . . .32  
Remote access to Web configurator . .76  
Remote management. . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Resetting  
base station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Resource name (messenger). . . . . . . .90  
RFC 2833. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86  
Ringback  
when busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
when the call is not answered . . . .117  
Ringer tone  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Search for subscriber on Gigaset.net . 25  
Searching  
handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
in directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Select entry (menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Sender's address (e-mail). . . . . . . . . . 47  
Sensitivity (room monitor). . . . . . . . . 60  
Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Server for firmware update . . . . . . . . 92  
Server port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Set default connection . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Set ringer tone melody . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Setting  
base station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
date/time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
flashing time (PABX) . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
handset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Setting/changing the screen picture . . 61  
Shortcut (digit combination) . . . . . . . 16  
Signal strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
Simple Transversal of UDP over  
NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
SIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
SIP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
SIP Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
SIP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 118  
SIP provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
SIP proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Slumber mode (alarm clock) . . . . . . . 65  
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
activating/deactivating function . . . 43  
changing mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
deleting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . . . .63  
127  
Index  
draft message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
STUN refresh time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
STUN server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Subnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Subnet mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
defining (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
defining (Web configurator) . . . . . . 76  
Suppressing  
silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
speech pauses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
speech pauses (VoIP) . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Symmetric NAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
input language . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 103  
linked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
mailbox ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
notification by SMS. . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
notification number . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
notification type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
PIN protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
registration assistant. . . . . . . . . . . .36  
replying to and forwarding . . . . . . .40  
rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
saving number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
self help with error messages . . . . .43  
sending to a personal mailbox. . . . .42  
sending to an e-mail address . . . . . .38  
setting up a mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
status report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
to a PABX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
writing/sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
SMS centre  
Talk key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
TCP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Text message, see SMS  
TLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
disconnecting call . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Touch tone dialling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Transferring PC address book  
into directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Transmission Control Protocol . . . . . 119  
Transmission rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Transport Layer Security . . . . . . . . . 119  
Transport protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
e-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Internet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
tsv file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Snooze (alarm clock) . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
Sound, see Ringer tone  
Special characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
Speed dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31  
Standard gateway  
entering (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
entering (Web configurator) . . . . . .76  
Star key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1, 63  
Start connection assistant (menu) . . .68  
State of presence (messenger) . . . . . .48  
setting own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Static IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 118  
Status  
buddy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
change own (messenger) . . . . . . . .50  
VoIP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
Status codes (VoIP), table . . . . . . . . . .97  
Status report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Storing anniversary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Structure of IP address . . . . . . . . . . .115  
STUN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
STUN port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Uniform Resource Identifier. . . . . . . 119  
Universal Resource Locator . . . . . . . 119  
Unknown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Unknown caller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
URI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
URL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Use random ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
User data, entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
User Datagram Protocol. . . . . . . . . . 119  
User ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
User identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
User name (VoIP account) . . . 13, 69, 79  
128  
Index  
loudspeaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
ringer tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
V
Versions check, automatic . . . . . . . . .93  
VIP (directory entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Voice over Internet Protocol . . . . . 7, 119  
Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Voice quality and infrastructure . . . . .85  
VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
accepting/rejecting call waiting . . . .29  
activating/deactivating call waiting .28  
activating/deactivating status  
WAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Warning tone, see Advisory tones  
Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
activating VoIP connection . . . . . . . 78  
alternative DNS server . . . . . . . . . . 76  
assigning receiving number . . . . . . 85  
assigning sending number . . . . . . . 85  
checking EEPROM version . . . . . . . 93  
checking firmware version . . . . . . . 93  
checking IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
checking MAC address . . . . . . . . . . 93  
connecting with PC . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
creating e-mail settings . . . . . . . . . 91  
deactivating VoIP connection . . . . . 78  
defining IP address. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
defining standard gateway. . . . . . . 76  
de-registering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
DTMF-reminder for VoIP . . . . . . . . . 86  
interface language. . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
IP configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
local network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
messenger access data. . . . . . . . . . 90  
name of a connection . . . . . . . . . . 77  
name of a VoIP connection. . . . . . . 78  
number assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
opening Web page. . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
phone status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
preferred DNS server . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
remote access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
selecting IP address type . . . . . . . . 75  
setting phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
specifying dialling plans . . . . . . . . . 87  
structure of the web pages. . . . . . . 73  
subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Web interface, see Web configurator  
message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
advantages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
assigning IP address . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
call diversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
completing settings . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
conference call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
configuring account . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
configuring account (first) . . . . . . .13  
connection name . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
external enquiry call . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
load provider data. . . . . . . . 12, 68, 82  
making call settings . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
network services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
phone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
preconditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
settings (on handset) . . . . . . . . . . .68  
start connection assistant . . . . . 12, 68  
status codes (table) . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
toggling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
VoIP connection  
activating/deactivating . . . . . . . 78, 81  
configuring (handset) . . . . . . . . . . .68  
configuring (Web configurator) . . . .78  
name (Web configurator) . . . . . 77, 78  
VoIP provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119  
download data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 82  
selecting (Web configurator) . . . . . .78  
updating data automatically . . . . . .93  
VoIP status messages  
activating display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
status codes table. . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
VoIP user data  
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
entering (handset) . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
entering (Web configurator) . . . . . .79  
Volume  
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Web server, see Web configurator  
Wide Area Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Working area (Web configurator) . . . . 74  
Writing (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Writing, editing text . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
earpiece. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
handset language. . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
129  
130  

Sylvania SCR1383 User Manual
Sony Ericsson J220a User Manual
Sony cdp 338esd User Manual
Sharp SCH R850 User Manual
Seagate Cheetah ST3450056SS (FDE) User Manual
Samsung MD65C User Manual
Salton FSCM200BM FSCM200M FSCM200RM FSCM200CBM User Manual
Pioneer DVR 110DU User Manual
Pioneer CD Player DEH P510UB User Manual
Panasonic CQ 730EUC User Manual